2.6
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high
unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches above
finish floor with a 45 degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure.
Cover opening in extension of frame with welded steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth
and flush with frame.
1.
2.7
Provide terminated stops unless otherwise indicated.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
2.
3.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
Provide countersunk, flat or oval head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
4.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
b.
2466 60
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
Single Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Double Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 5
D.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold or
hot rolled steel sheet.
E.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.
2.8
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface mounted door
hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and
type of installation indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast curing, lead and chromate free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing in for embedded and built in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2466 60
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 6
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.3
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from
jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface mounted door
hardware.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
2466 60
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
In Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 7
4.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non Fire Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.4
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after
installation.
C.
Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
2466 60
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 8
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 081743
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors
Division 8 Section “Aluminum framed Entrances and Storefronts” for aluminum framed
storefronts and aluminum frames.
Division 8 Sections for Door Hardware.
Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in FRP doors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain FRP doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Conform to the following requirements:
1.
2.
2466 60
NAAMM and AAMA Applicable Standards.
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for a Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS
081743 1
a.
b.
3.
Additional Criteria:
a.
b.
1.5
Flame spread:
Interior faces not greater than 10 (Class ‘A’); exterior faces not
than 145 (Class ‘C’).
Smoke development: Interior faces not greater than 320 (Class ‘A’); exterior faces
not than 345 (Class ‘C’).
Impact Strength:
1)
ASTM D 256; 13.5 foot pounds per inch, nominal (FRP); 9.0 foot pounds
(AMP).
Abrasion resistant:
1)
ASTM D 1242; 0.23% weight loss (FRP); 0.18% (AMP).
c.
Weatherability:
1)
ASTM D 570; 0.20 – 0.40% weight gain.
d.
Hardness:
1)
ASTM D 2583; 50, (Barcol Meter).
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Deliver materials to jobsite in their original, unopened packages with labels intact. Inspect
materials; reject damaged units.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
Handle entrance doors and components to avoid damage. Protect entrance doors against damage
from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after entrance
installation.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Provide written warranty from manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship.
1.
Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a.
2466 60
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors: Ten years.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS
081743 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors:
a.
b.
c.
2.
2.2
Commercial Door Systems, Philadelphia, PA.
Kawneer Company, Inc.
Special Lite, Inc., Decatur, MI.
Color: Dark Bronze
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Door Thickness: 1 3/4 inches.
B.
Stiles and Rails: Aluminum Alloy 6063 T5, minimum of 2 5/16 inch depth.
C.
Corners: Mitered.
D.
Provide joinery of 3/8 inch diameter full width tie rods through extruded splines top and bottom
as standard tubular shaped stiles and rails reinforced to accept hardware as specified.
E.
Securing Internal Door Extrusions: 3/16 inch angle blocks and locking hex nuts for joinery.
Welds, glue, or other methods are not acceptable.
F.
Furnish extruded stiles and rails with integral reglets to accept face sheets. Lock face sheets
into place to permit flush appearance.
G.
Rail caps or other face sheet capture methods are not acceptable.
H.
Extrude top and bottom rail legs for interlocking continuous weather bar.
I.
Meeting Stiles: Pile brush weatherseals. Extrude meeting stile to include integral pocket to
accept pile brush weatherseals.
J.
Bottom of Door: Install bottom weather bar with nylon brush weatherstripping into extruded
interlocking edge of bottom rail.
K.
Door Face Sheet: (FRP), .120” thickness fiberglass reinforced polyester with pebble like
embossed pattern.
L.
Core:
1.
Material: Poured in place polyurethane foam.
2.
Density: Minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot.
3.
R Value: Minimum of 11.
2466 60
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS
081743 3
M.
Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels. Factory install
vision lites, louvers, and panels.
N.
Pre machine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and
hardware schedule. Factory install hardware.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements shall be as
indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Coordination of Fabrication:
measurements on shop drawings.
C.
Assembly:
1.
2.
Field measure before fabrication and show recorded
Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly.
Remove burrs from cut edges.
D.
Welding: Welding of doors or frames is not acceptable.
E.
Fit:
1.
2.
Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.
Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting
members.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect
installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C.
Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
2466 60
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS
081743 4
D.
Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved
by Architect.
E.
Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined
by Architect.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding.
CLEANING
A.
Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without
damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 081743
2466 60
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS
081743 5
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 082200
FIRE RATED FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Fire Rated Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors
Fire Rated Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Frames
Division 8 Sections for Door Hardware.
Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in FRP doors.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D 256 Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics.
B.
ASTM D 543 Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents.
C.
ASTM D 570 Water Absorption of Plastics.
D.
ASTM D 638 Tensile Properties of Plastics.
E.
ASTM D 790 Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials.
F.
ASTM D 1308 Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes.
G.
ASTM D 2583 Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
H.
ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
I.
NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2466 60
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
082200 1
J.
UBC Standard 7 2 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
K.
UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified
performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard
systems.
B.
60 Minute Full Scale Vertical Fire Test of Doors, Positive Pressure: Complied with acceptance
criteria for 60 minute rating.
1.
UBC Standard 7 2.
2.
NFPA 252.
3.
UL 10C.
C.
Surface Burning Characteristics, Class A Faces of FRP Interior Panels, ASTM E 84:
1.
Flame Spread: Maximum of 25.
2.
Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450.
D.
Surface Burning Characteristics, Class C Faces of FRP Exterior Panels, ASTM E 84:
1.
Flame Spread: Maximum of 200.
2.
Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450.
E.
Impact Strength, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 256: 15.0 foot pounds per inch
of notch.
F.
Tensile Strength, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 638: 14,000 psi.
G.
Flexural Strength, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 790: 21,000 psi.
H.
Water Absorption, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 570: 0.20 percent after 24
hours.
I.
Indentation Hardness, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 2583: 55.
J.
Abrasion Resistance, Face Sheet, Taber Abrasion Test, 25 Cycles at 1,000 Gram Weight with CS 17
Wheel: Maximum of 0.029 average weight loss percentage.
K.
Stain Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Face sheet unaffected after exposure to red cabbage, tea, and
tomato acid. Stain removed easily with mild abrasive or FRP cleaner when exposed to crayon and
crankcase oil.
L.
Chemical Resistance, ASTM D 543. Excellent rating.
1.
Acetic acid, Concentrated.
2.
Ammonium Hydroxide, Concentrated.
3.
Citric Acid, 10%.
4.
Formaldehyde.
5.
Hydrochloric Acid, 10%
6.
Sodium hypochlorite, 4 to 6 percent solution.
2466 60
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
082200 2
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other
pertinent data.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain FRP doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed fiberglass door and frame
installations similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in service performance.
C.
Source Limitations: Hardware and accessories for all FRP doors as specified in Section 087100 shall
be installed by the fiberglass door and frame manufacturer.
D.
Source Limitations: Glass for windows in doors shall be factory installed by door and frame
manufacturer in accordance with related section, Division 8, Glazing.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Deliver materials to jobsite in their original, unopened packages with labels intact. Inspect materials;
reject damaged units.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
Handle entrance doors and components to avoid damage. Protect entrance doors against damage
from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after entrance
installation.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
WARRANTY
A.
2466 60
Special Warranty: Provide written warranty from manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
082200 3
1.
Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors: Ten years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Simon Door
Edgewater FRP Door.
Special Lite, Inc., Decatur, MI.
Or approved manufacturer.
FRP FIRE RATED DOORS
A.
Basis of design: Simon Door 90/60/45 minute fire rated doors.
B.
Door Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Color: Dark Bronze to match exterior doors
2.3
FRP FIRE RATED FRAMES
A.
Basis of design: Simon Door; 90/60/45 minute fire rated frames.
B.
Frame Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Color: Dark Bronze to match exterior door frames.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and profile requirements shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.
B.
Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded measurements on
shop drawings.
C.
Assembly:
1.
2466 60
Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
082200 4
2.
D.
Fit:
1.
2.
2.5
Remove burrs from cut edges.
Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.
Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting members.
FIRE RATED HARDWARE
A.
Pre machine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and
hardware schedule.
B.
Factory install hardware, except field apply gaskets and seals.
C.
Hardware Schedule: As specified in Section 087100.
D.
Finish: As specified in Section 087100.
E.
Gaskets and Seals:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Gaskets: Pemko S88.
Smoke Seals: Pemko HSS2000, 1/2 inch wide.
Smoke Seals, Pair Doors, Meeting Stile: Pemko S77.
VISION LITES
A.
Vision Lites are to be factory installed.
B.
Vision Lites: As specified in Section 088000.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect
installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.
INSTALLATION
A.
2466 60
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
082200 5
B.
Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.
C.
Install gaskets and seals to doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by
Architect.
E.
Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by
Architect.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding.
CLEANING
A.
Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or
deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 082200
2466 60
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
082200 6
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 083613
SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes electrically operated sectional overhead doors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to
the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation
of door components:
1.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
a.
2.
Air Infiltration:
ASTM E 283.
a.
3.
Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to
Maximum Rate: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph.
Impact Test for Flying Debris:
ASTM E 1886.
a.
b.
2466 41
Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward.
Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to
Level of Protection: Basic Protection.
Wind Zone One: 110 mph, pressure test to 3/4 and 1 1/2 x design pressure
(positive and negative).
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 1
B.
1.5
Operation Cycle Requirements: Provide sectional overhead door components and operators
capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of sectional overhead door and accessory. Include the
following:
1.
2.
B.
1.6
Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.
Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
1.
Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single
Obtain operators and controls from sectional overhead door manufacturer.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sectional
overhead doors and accessories and are based on the specific system indicated. Other
manufacturers' systems with equal performance and dimensional characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Steel Doors with Insulated Steel Panels:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2466 41
Amarr Garage Doors.
Arm R Lite.
Clopay Building Products Company; a Griffon Company.
General American Door Company.
Martin Door Manufacturing.
Overhead Door Corp.
Raynor.
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 2
h.
2.2
Wayne Dalton Corp.
STEEL DOOR SECTIONS
A.
Construct door sections including face sheets and frames from zinc coated (galvanized), cold
rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating
designation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Fabricate door panels from a single sheet to provide sections not more than 24 inches high and
nominally 2 inches deep. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed,
rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue in groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return.
1.
C.
Minimum Base Metal (Uncoated) Thickness for Section Faces: 0.053 inch.
Exterior Section Face: Flat.
Exterior Section Face: Manufacturer's standard grooved, ribbed or fluted.
For insulated doors, provide door sections with continuous thermal break construction,
separating faces of door.
Enclose open sections with channel end stiles formed from not less than 0.064 inch thick
galvanized steel sheet and weld end stiles to door section in place. Provide intermediate stiles
formed from not less than 0.064 inch thick galvanized steel sheet, cut to door section profile,
and welded in place.
1.
Stile Spacing: Not more than 48 inches apart.
D.
Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle complying with bottom section
profile and allowing installation of astragal.
E.
Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen
door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed
to depth and bolted or welded in place.
F.
Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
G.
Thermal Insulation: Insulate inner core of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard
polystyrene or polyurethane board insulation, with maximum flame spread and smoke
developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84; or with glass fiber
board insulation. Secure insulation to door section. Enclose insulation completely within steel
sections that incorporate the following inside facing material, with no exposed insulation
material evident:
1.
2.
H.
2466 41
Inside Facing Material: Zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet with a minimum base
(uncoated) metal thickness of 0.028 inch.
Inside Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard prefinished hardboard panel, 1/8 inch
thick and complying with AHA A 135.5.
Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and
free of warp, twist, and deformation.
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 3
I.
Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces
are free of oil and other contaminants.
a.
2.
Apply manufacturer's standard primer and powder coat finish to interior and exterior
door faces after forming, according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for
application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.
a.
2.3
Pretreat zinc coated steel, after cleaning, with a conversion coating of type suited
to organic coating applied over it.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range
TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized steel track system, sized for door size and weight,
designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown, and complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly
including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball bearing roller guides for
required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced at 2 inches apart for door
drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design to ensure tight closure
at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports.
1.
Provide tracks configured for the following lift types:
a.
B.
Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel track reinforcement and support
members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce,
and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without
sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors.
1.
Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and
attached to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling) tracks with continuous angle welded to
track and supported by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members at
curve and end of tracks.
a.
C.
2466 41
Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780.
Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather stripping gaskets of
flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of overhead door.
1.
2.
D.
High.
Provide motor operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
Provide continuous flexible seals at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
Windows: Type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or
neoprene glazing channel for metal framed doors and elastic glazing compound for wood doors,
as required. Provide removable stops of same material as door section frames.
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 4
1.
2.
2.4
Size: Manufacturer's standard for type of glazing indicated.
Clear Float Glass: 3 mm thick and complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,
Quality Q3.
HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide heavy duty, corrosion resistant hardware, with hot dip galvanized, stainless
steel, or other corrosion resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
B.
Hinges: Heavy duty galvanized steel hinges of not less than 0.0747 inch thick, uncoated steel
at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written
recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with
bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self tapping fasteners where access
to nuts is not possible. Provide double end hinges where required, for doors exceeding 16 feet
in width, unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
C.
Rollers: Heavy duty rollers with steel ball bearings in case hardened steel races, mounted with
varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double
hinges are required. Provide 3 inch diameter roller tires for 3 inch wide track and 2 inch
diameter roller tires for 2 inch wide track.
1.
Tire Material: Case hardened steel.
D.
Push/Pull Handles: For push up operated or emergency operated doors, provide galvanized
steel lifting handles on each side of door.
E.
Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam
plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks.
1.
F.
2.5
Locking Bars: Full disc cremone type, both jamb sides operable from inside only.
If door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when
door is locked.
COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A.
Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable tension torsion springs
fabricated from oil tempered steel wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, Class II,
mounted on a cross header tube or steel shaft. Connect to door with galvanized aircraft type lift
cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. Provide springs calibrated for a minimum of
10,000 cycles.
B.
Cable Safety Device: Include a spring loaded, steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door
roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks.
C.
Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the
wall and to level shaft and prevent sag.
D.
Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
2466 41
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 5
2.6
ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A.
General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and
provided by door manufacturer for door and operation cycle requirements specified, with
electric motor and factory prewired motor controls, starter, gear reduction unit, solenoid
operated brake, clutch, remote control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking
door, and accessories required for proper operation.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Disconnect Device: Hand operated disconnect device or mechanism for automatically engaging
chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while
disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect device and
operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically
prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
D.
Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit switch adjustment and
without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
E.
Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,
with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc.
F.
Door Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor and the following:
1.
G.
Electric Motors: High starting torque, reversible, continuous duty, Class A insulated, electric
motors complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and
operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps and not more than
1 fps, without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
2466 41
Type: Polyphase, medium induction type.
Service Factor: Comply with NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building
electrical system.
Provide open dripproof type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
Provide totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan cooled motor, fitted with plugged drain,
and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where indicated.
Remote Control Station: Momentary contact, three button control station with push button
controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1.
I.
Jackshaft gear head hoist type, with enclosed worm gear, running in oil, primary drive;
chain and sprocket secondary drive; auxiliary chain hoist; and floor level quick release
for manual operation.
Provide full guarded, surface mounted, heavy duty type interior unit with general
purpose, NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic
safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of sensor
immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 6
1.
Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction
in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.
a.
Self Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to
detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self monitoring
feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.
J.
Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically
stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.
K.
Radio Control: Radio control system consisting of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Three channel, universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door; one per operator.
Multifunction remote control.
Remote antenna mounting kit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb
and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
B.
Fasten vertical track assembly to framing, spaced not less than 24 inches apart. Hang horizontal
track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers fastened to framing by
welding or bolting or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as
required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment.
3.2
STARTUP SERVICES
A.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup services.
1.
2.
3.3
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
B.
Adjust belt driven motors as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2466 41
Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt driven motors.
Align pulleys and install belts.
Tension belt according to manufacturer's written instructions.
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 7
C.
3.4
Touch up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized track to track supports, clean field
welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain sectional overhead doors. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 083613
2466 41
SECTIONAL DOORS
083613 8
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with
aluminum framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this
Section.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this
Section.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide aluminum framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Structural loads.
Thermal movements.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
Failure includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2466 60
Deflection exceeding specified limits.
Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
Glazing to glazing contact.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Sealant failure.
Failure of operating units to function properly.
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 1
B.
Structural Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in structural sealant joints
of less than 20 psi.
C.
Structural Loads:
1.
D.
Structural Test Performance:
ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Wind Loads: 25 P.S.F.
Provide aluminum framed systems tested according to
When tested at positive and negative wind load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.
Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
F.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static air pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
G.
Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static air pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H.
Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum framed systems with fixed glazing and framing
areas having condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
I.
Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum framed systems with fixed glazing and
framing areas having average U factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested
according to AAMA 1503.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
2466 60
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 2
1.
2.
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.
For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D.
Maintenance Data: For aluminum framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
E.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work
of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1.
B.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum framed systems including
Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of
tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in service performance.
1.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
C.
Accessible Entrances: Comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding
Code Aluminum."
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.
2466 60
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum framed systems
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 3
without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
CMI Architectural Products, Inc.
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer.
Tubelite, Inc.
United States Aluminum.
Vistawall Architectural Products.
Cross Aluminum Products.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum framing members of 0.125”
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2466 60
Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded
aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal
conductance.
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 4
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements:
Manufacturer's standard high strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self locking devices.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
D.
Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing
compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to
match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible
deflection.
E.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer
for joint type.
2.4
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded,
that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
D.
Bond Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to
which sealants will not develop adhesion.
E.
Glazing Sealants: For structural sealant glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for
joint type and as follows:
1.
Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral curing silicone formulation compatible with
system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for
use as structural sealant, and approved by structural sealant manufacturer for use in
aluminum framed systems indicated.
a.
2.
Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and
O; neutral curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other
system components with which it comes in contact; and recommended by structural and
weatherseal sealant and aluminum framed system manufacturers for this use.
a.
2466 60
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Color: Matching structural sealant.
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 5
2.5
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum framed systems, as specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Bituminous Paint:
Cold applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 mil thickness per coat.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).
E.
Structural Sealant Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary
support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F.
Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw spline system.
G.
Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing hardware.
1.
2.
2466 60
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal to metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 6
2.7
ALUMINUM FINISHES FOR FRAME
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
1.
Color: Dark bronze.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
2466 60
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 7
F.
Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
1.
Structural Sealant Glazing:
a.
b.
G.
Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and
according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof
joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight
closure.
Field Installed Hardware: Install surface mounted hardware according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H.
Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to
produce weathertight installation.
I.
Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1.
2.
Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet;
1/4 inch over total length.
Alignment:
a.
b.
3.
3.3
Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.4
Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
ADJUSTING
A.
Entrances:
Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions.
1.
For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3 second
closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70 degree open position to 3 inches from
the latch measured to the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION 084113
2466 60
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113 8
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Commercial door hardware for the following:
a.
b.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
C.
1.3
Swinging doors.
Other doors to the extent indicated.
Division 08 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and FRP Doors for hardware.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,
purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Qualification Data: For Architectural Hardware Consultant.
C.
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include
final hardware and keying schedule.
D.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
E.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
2466 60
Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures
and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 1
a.
b.
c.
Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's
"Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and
number and date each page.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as
in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
d.
1.4
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating and material of each door
and frame.
Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item.
Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening
including name and manufacturer.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of each door hardware set, cross referenced to Drawings, both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the door hardware sets at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other
information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.
1.
2.
Installer's responsibilities include installing door hardware and providing qualified
tradesmen during the course of the Work to consult with Architect, and Owner about
door hardware and keying.
Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI
as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting
services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall carefully review
specified hardware against the floor plan door openings; to assure it will swing and function as
intended. Bring any conflicts to the attention of the Contractor, Construction Manager or
Architect before submitting hardware schedules for approval.
C.
Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252, UBC Standard 7 2.
1.
2466 60
Test Pressure: Test at positive pressure.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 2
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets,
and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or
package.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
1.7
Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to
be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply
with indicated requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:
a.
b.
1.8
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
Locksets Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manual Closers: Ten years from date stamped on closer body.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
2466 60
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and
door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and door hardware sets indicated in
Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 3
1.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description, quality, and function.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, manufacturers specified, or
named as acceptable.
HINGES, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Template Requirements: Provide only template produced units.
HINGES
A.
Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
B.
Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C.
Manufacturers:
1.
Bommer Industries, Inc. (BOM).
2.
Hager Companies (HAG).
3.
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll Rand Company (IVE).
4.
McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).
5.
PBB, Inc. (PBB).
6.
Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STA).
2.4
CONTINUOUS HINGES
A.
Standard: BHMA A156.26, Grade 2 600.
1.
B.
General: Minimum 0.120 inch thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches;
fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components
finished after milling and drilling are complete.
1.
2466 60
Listed under Category N in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
Fire Pins: Steel pins to hold labeled fire doors in place if required by tested listing.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 4
C.
Continuous, Gear Type Hinges: Extruded aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined by a
continuous extruded aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self lubricating thrust bearings.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.5
Bommer Industries, Inc. (BOM.
Hager Companies (HAG).
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll Rand Company (IVE).
McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).
Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).
Select Products Limited (SEL).
Stanley Commercial Hardware Div. the Stanley Works (STA).
LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL
A.
Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,
comply with Michigan Building Code 2009.
1.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
B.
Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not
require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or
special knowledge for operation.
C.
Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with lip
extended to protect frame.
2.6
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply
with the following:
1.
Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.
B.
Mortise Locks: Stamped non Ferris case with
BHMA A156.13, Grade 1 Series 1000. Where listed.
1.
2.7
stainless
steel
or
brass
parts;
Manufacturer:
a.
Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(C/R).
b.
Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SAR).
c.
Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll Rand Company (SCH).
LOCK CYLINDERS
A.
Lock Cylinder Housings: Corbin/Russwin Large Format Removable Core Type, Less Cores.
B.
Permanent Cores: Medeco Large Format Key Mark – X4 Patent 2027. Will be provided by
Dexter Schools.
2466 60
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 5
2.8
KEYING
A.
2.9
Keying will be done by Dexter Schools.
CLOSERS
A.
Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices
are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Michigan Building Code
2009.
1.
Comply with the following maximum opening force requirements:
a.
Interior, Non Fire Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
B.
Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not
require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to
minimum required width.
C.
Size of Units:
Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions
and requirements for opening force.
D.
Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Provide type of arm required for closer to be located
on non public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.10
A.
Manufacturer:
a.
LCN Closers; an Ingersoll Rand Company (LCN). No substitution, owner’s
standard.
STOPS AND HOLDERS
Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1.
Provide wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are scheduled or indicated.
Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are
not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
B.
Combination Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
C.
Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum
diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled in application to frame.
D.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2466 60
Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH).
Door Controls International (DCI).
Hager Companies (HAG).
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll Rand Company (IVE).
McKinney; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 6
6.
7.
2.11
Rockwood Manufacturing Company (ROC). Except overhead stops.
Trimco (TRI).
THRESHOLDS
A.
Standard: BHMA A156.21.
B.
Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with Michigan Building Code 2009.
1.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch high for exterior sliding doors.
C.
Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high.
D.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.12
Hager Companies (HAG).
National Guard Products (NGP).
Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).
Reese Enterprises (REE).
FABRICATION
A.
Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if
different from specified standard.
B.
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum
fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat head screws with finished heads to match
surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
2.13
FINISHES
A.
Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2466 60
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
B.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install
surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1.
2.
C.
3.3
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
1.
3.4
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in
each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
ADJUSTING
A.
2466 60
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 8
1.
3.5
Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep
period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds
to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6
DOOR HARDWARE SETS
HW SET: 10
DOOR NUMBER:
120A
120B
121A
EACH TO HAVE:
1
ALL HARDWARE
121B
BY DOOR MANUFACTURER
UNK
HW SET: 11
DOOR NUMBER:
120C
120D
EACH TO HAVE:
6
EA HINGE
1
EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
1
EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
1
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
1
EA PASSAGE SET
1
EA SURFACE CLOSER
2
EA KICK PLATE
2
EA WALL STOP & HOLDER
5BB1HW 5 X 4.5
FB458 (BOTTOM)
FB458 (TOP)
DP2
ML2010 LWM M26
4111 EDA
8400 10" X 1" LDW
WS40
652
626
626
626
626
689
630
626
IVE
IVE
IVE
IVE
CR
LCN
IVE
IVE
EACH TO HAVE:
1
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1
EA PASSAGE SET
1
EA SURFACE CLOSER
1
EA WALL STOP & HOLDER
1
EA THRESHOLD
SL11 85"
ML2010 LWM M26
4111 EDA SRI
WS40
424BR
313
626
689
626
613
SEL
CR
LCN
IVE
NGP
2466 60
DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: A10
DOOR NUMBER:
120E
087100 9
HW SET: A11
DOOR NUMBER:
121C
EACH TO HAVE:
1
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1
EA STOREROOM LOCK
1
EA MORTISE CYLINDER
1
EA ELECTRIC STRIKE
1
EA CYLINDER CORE
1
1
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
SURFACE CLOSER
WALL STOP
THRESHOLD
DOOR SWEEP
WEATHER SEAL
SL40 85"
ML2057 LWM LC M26
HOUSING 1070 118
712 75
LARGE FORMAT KEY MARK X4 PATENT
2027
4111 EDA
WS401CVX
896BRN
C627DKB
SUPPLY WITH DOOR AND FRAME
ASSEMBLY
313
626
626
630
626
SEL
CR
CR
HES
MED
689
626
613
313
LCN
IVE
NGP
NGP
628
626
626
626
626
626
626
SEL
IVE
IVE
IVE
CR
CR
MED
689
626
613
LCN
IVE
NGP
CLOSER MAY REQUIRE SPECIAL TEMPLATING
HW SET: A12
DOOR NUMBER:
122
EACH TO HAVE:
2
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1
EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
1
EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
1
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
1
EA STOREROOM LOCK
1
EA MORTISE CYLINDER
1
EA CYLINDER CORE
1
2
1
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA WALL STOP
EA THRESHOLD
SL11 85"
FB0458 (BOTTOM)
FB0458 (TOP)
DP2
ML2057 LWM LC M26
HOUSING 1070 118
LARGE FORMAT KEY MARK X4 PATENT
2027
4111 EDA SRI
WS401CVX
424BR
VERIFY LOCKSET FUNCTION WITH OWNER
2466 60
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 10
HW SET: A13
DOOR NUMBER:
102A
123
EACH TO HAVE:
1
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1
EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
1
EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
1
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
1
EA FSE OS LVR LK'D
1
EA MORTISE CYLINDER
1
EA CYLINDER CORE
1
2
1
2
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
SURFACE CLOSER
OVERHEAD STOP
THRESHOLD
DOOR SWEEP
WEATHER SEAL
SL11 85"
SL11 CTW 4 85"
FB0458 (BOTTOM)
FB0458 (TOP)
DP1
ML20905 LWM LC 24V&AC/DC
HOUSING 1070 118
LARGE FORMAT KEY MARK X4 PATENT
2027
4111 EDA X ST3447
814S
896BRN
C627DKB
SUPPLY WITH DOOR AND FRAME
ASSEMBLY
313
313
626
626
613
626
626
626
SEL
SEL
IVE
IVE
IVE
CR
CR
MED
689
630
613
313
LCN
GLY
NGP
NGP
LOCKSET UNLOCKED WHEN POWER IS SUPPLIED
WIRE RACE WAY REQUIRED IN DOOR
INSTALL OVERHEAD STOP TO TEMPLATE FIRST THEN INSTALL CLOSER
END OF SECTION 087100
2466 60
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 11
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Doors.
Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for installation of glazing.
Division 08 Section "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic ‘FRP’ Doors" for installation of
glazing.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as
defined in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses:
ASTM C 1036.
C.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
D.
Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
E.
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
2466 60
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
GLAZING
088000 1
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
F.
1.4
Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes
exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other
defects in construction.
B.
Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in service conditions. Provide glass
lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than
thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1.
Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
a.
Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from
basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to
ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures":
Section 6.5, "Method 2 Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above
grade indicated on Drawings.
b.
Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1)
c.
Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than
15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action.
1)
d.
Load Duration: 30 days.
Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4
edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind
pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.
1)
2)
3)
2466 60
Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
For monolithic glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.
For insulating glass.
For laminated glass lites.
GLAZING
088000 2
e.
f.
C.
Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass
framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.
D.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures
indicated below:
1.
2.
For insulating glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
Center of Glass Values: Based on using LBL 44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program
for the following methodologies:
a.
b.
c.
1.5
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
Thickness of Tinted and Heat Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for
each tint color indicated throughout Project.
U Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.
Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass
installations with a record of successful in service performance; and who employs glass
installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified
Glass Installer Program.
B.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single
manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and
insulating glass.
C.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.
D.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric
glazing sealants:
2466 60
GLAZING
088000 3
E.
Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and local codes.
1.
1.7
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass:
Sealed Insulating Glass Units."
SIGMA TM 3000, "Glazing Guidelines for
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B.
For insulating glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with
insulating glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.
1.9
Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form,
made out to Owner and signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to Owner and signed by laminated glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
C.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to Owner and signed by insulating glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
2466 60
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
GLAZING
088000 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality Q3; of class,
kind, and condition indicated.
1.
2.3
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat
strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,
complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed cell, integral skinned gaskets of
material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and
hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.4
Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
EPDM, ASTM C 864.
Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
Any material indicated above.
Neoprene.
EPDM.
Silicone.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
Any material indicated above.
Lock Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
2466 60
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
GLAZING
088000 5
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.5
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
2.6
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
2466 60
GLAZING
088000 6
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to
obtain fire resistance rating.
2.7
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.8
MONOLITHIC FLOAT GLASS UNITS
A.
2.9
Uncoated Clear Float Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened)
float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements and
Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass
TEMPERED GLAZING TYPES
A.
Glass Type GL 1: Class I (clear), fully tempered float glass, ¼ inch nominal thickness.
1.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1.
2.
2466 60
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
GLAZING
088000 7
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant substrate testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
2466 60
GLAZING
088000 8
J.
Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
K.
Square cut wedge shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket
by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
2466 60
GLAZING
088000 9
3.6
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7
LOCK STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A.
3.8
Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions.
supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088000
2466 60
GLAZING
088000 10
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 099600
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and application of high performance coating systems on
the following substrates:
1.
Interior Substrates:
a.
b.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
Steel.
Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
Division 09 painting Sections for special use coatings and general field painting.
Division 03 Section for finishing of Concrete Substrates (Horizontal).
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat indicated.
1.
2466 60
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 1
2.
3.
4.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Cross reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
VOC content.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
2.
1.7
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
2466 60
Benjamin Moore & Co.
ICI Paints.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 2
4.
2.2
Sherwin Williams Company (The)/General Polymers.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in
"MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
3.
C.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and,
for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants
added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
2.3
Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.
Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Anti Corrosive and Anti Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
Zinc Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pre Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
Colors: As indicated in color schedule in Specification 099123.
BLOCK FILLERS
A.
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.
B.
Block Filler/Sealer: Equal to Sherwin Williams Kem Cati Coat HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer. (At
garage & wash bays)
2.4
INTERIOR PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
2.5
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.
METAL PRIMERS
A.
2466 60
Primer, Rust Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 3
2.6
EPOXY COATINGS
A.
Pre Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, Interior, Gloss Level 4 Semi Gloss MPI #115.
B.
Epoxy: Equal to Sherwin Williams Macroepoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy. (At garage & wash
bays).
2.7
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are
incompatible.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
a.
b.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
B.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
C.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
2466 60
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 4
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
D.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface applied protection.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted
in manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1500 to 4000 psi at 6 to 12
inches.
Abrasive blast clean surfaces to comply with SSPC SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush Off Blast
Cleaning."
E.
Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
3.3
SSPC
SSPC
SSPC
SSPC
SSPC
SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush Off Blast Cleaning."
SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near White Blast Cleaning."
SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."
Shop Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC PA 1 for touching up shop primed surfaces.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply high performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1.
2.
3.
2466 60
Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to
match exposed surfaces.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 5
4.
Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color
breaks.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces.
3.5
INTERIOR HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
CMU Substrates: (At garage & wash bays)
1.
Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
2466 60
Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.
Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, semi gloss, MPI #115.
Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #115.
Color : See Schedule at the end of Specification Section 099600
Block Filler: 1 Coat, Equal to Sherwin Williams Kem Cati Coat HS Epoxy
Filler/Sealer.
Topcoat: 2 Coats, Equal to Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy.
Color : See Schedule at the end of Specification Section 099600
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 6
C.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Epoxy Modified Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Steel Substrates: (At garage & wash bays)
1.
High Build Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
3.6
Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
Intermediate Coat:
Epoxy modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss
Level 6), MPI #115.
Topcoat: Epoxy modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #115.
Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
Topcoat: 2 Coats, Equal to Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy.
Color: See schedule at the end of Specification Section 099600
PAINT COLOR SCHEUDLE
A.
Interior Paint P 1: Where this paint color designation is indicated; provide the following:
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer: Approved Manufacturer
Color: To Match existing “Dark Brown” at exposed structure in garage bays.
Interior Paint P 2: Where this paint color designation is indicated; provide the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer: Approved Manufacturer
Color: To Match existing “Cream” at walls in garage bays.
END OF SECTION 099600
2466 60
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 7
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes portable, hand carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire
extinguisher and mounting brackets
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2466 60
Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 1
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PORTABLE, HAND CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
B.
2.2
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
b.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
c.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
d.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
e.
Potter Roemer LLC.
2.
3.
4.
Valves: Manufacturer's standard
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL rated 3 A:40 B:C, 5 lb nominal
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate based dry chemical in enameled steel container.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
2466 60
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard[ galvanized steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or black baked enamel finish.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 2
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Potter Roemer LLC.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
Identify bracket mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a.
Orientation: Vertical
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
B.
3.2
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in
compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
B.
Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 104416
2466 60
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
104416 3
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 111142
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes vehicle washing equipment designed for the following types of vehicles:
1.
B.
The Owner is requesting a bid for a touchless vehicle wash system utilizing reclaim water for its high
pressure and high volume rinse.
1.
1.3
School buses, cars, trucks and all vehicles up to 12’ high and 40’ long
Touchless In Bay Automatic Drive Thru Type. System shall be totally automatic being actuated
by a vehicle driving thru the touchless automatic wash system that is mounted in wash bay
meeting the minimum specification specified herein.
WASH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
This system shall be an industrial quality, drive thru wash system being able to complete a wash in
less than 3 minutes. The wash system shall be touchless, utilizing an alkaline detergent cleaning
method to breakdown and remove soils without the use of any brushes or friction devices touching the
vehicle. After the vehicle has completed its trip through the rinse arch there shall be an additional
separate intensified rear rinse manifold for additional rinse cleaning of the rear of the vehicle.
1.
Vehicle wash system shall be of commercial duty, and adequately clean the Owner’s fleet
including all styles of vehicles up to 12” high and 40’ long for front, roof, both sides and rear.
2.
Vehicles washed at this system will be all vehicles up to 12' tall, owned by the Dexter
Community Schools. These vehicles will include irregular shaped vehicles.
B.
The general contractor and the manufacturer of the wash system is responsible for the supply of
necessary equipment, materials and service for the complete assembly and erection of the equipment
so that it is ready for operation as per all applicable specifications.
C.
The vehicle wash system shall be set in place and mounted by the manufacturer and interconnected
and connected to the building services by the contractor's plumbing and electrical contractor.
D.
Start up and commissioning of the wash system shall be performed by the wash system manufacturer.
E.
Training of Dexter Community School Employees shall be performed by the wash system
manufacturer.
2466 60
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 1
F.
1.4
In order to insure minimum downtime and operational costs, the vehicle wash design must utilize non
proprietary components that are readily available in the general marketplace, without being dependent
upon a single supplier for replacement parts and/or components. This is to protect the best interest of
the procuring entity and it financial resources.
BID PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The information shall be assembled in three ring binders complete with Table of Contents.
B.
The Table of Contents shall be as follows:
1.
Tab No. 1 Cover Letter.
2.
Tab No. 2 Bid Proposal Form, Bid Security and other required documents.
3.
Tab No. 3 Wash Equipment.
4.
Tab No. 4 Warranties.
5.
Tab No. 5 Description of “Work by Others”.
6.
Tab No. 6 Miscellaneous
C.
Description of Contents:
1.
Tab No. 1, Cover Letter, maximum of 2 pages and shall include an executive overview of the
project.
2.
Tab No. 2, Bid Proposal Form shall include a completed Bid Form, the required bid security,
and other documents as required by the general conditions.
3.
Tab No. 3, Wash Equipment shall include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
4.
1.5
Manufacturer’s Name.
Number of years providing similar equipment.
Number of years installing similar equipment.
A list of ALL touchless heavy duty vehicle wash systems installed by the bidder in the
State of Michigan. This list shall include all such touchless vehicle wash installations
made by the bidder in the last ten (10) years including the duration of the service and
application. Should the reference list have more than 25 names, a list of last 25
installations in Michigan shall suffice. Provide name of contact person at each location
who is familiar with the operation and maintenance of the wash system.
Description of system operation.
Submit the number of expected washes per hour.
Describe the quality of parts, materials and equipment used in the system.
Describe how reliable the system is based on actual installations of similar equipment.
Completion of detailed minimum specifications check list. The bidder must indicate
whether each specification in this bid is met. Any deviations to the requirements or
equipment design in this section must be explained in detail.
Tab No. 4, Description of “Work by Others”, include a complete description of the work
required by other trades and not included in the Wash System Bid Proposal to provide a fully
functional wash system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings that have floor plans or isometric view of the equipment
being installed.
a.
2466 60
Submit Product Data in strict accordance with requirements of these specifications.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 2
b.
c.
Scale drawings showing wash equipment layout, location and utility services to be
furnished and installed by the contractor.
Restrict submittal material to pertinent data. For instance, do not include manufacturer's
complete catalog when pertinent information is contained on a single page.
B.
Additional cost resulting from substitution of products other than those specified, including drawing
changes and construction cost. Will be at the expense of the contractor and wash system manufacturer.
C.
Closeout Submittals:
a.
1.6
Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Submit one (1) bound and one (1) electronic
maintenance and operating manuals, including operating and maintenance instructions,
emergency information, spare parts list and similar information, for each item of vehicle
washing equipment required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A supplier shall have been regularly engaged in the design and supply of
the type equipment specified herein, for a period of not less than five years. All similar items shall be
the products of one manufacturer. The equipment offered shall be the latest standard product, modified
as necessary to meet the requirements of the specification.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Vehicle washing equipment installed by the contractor must supervised by the
manufacturer's qualified installation employee.
C.
Regulatory Requirements:
a.
D.
Electrical Code: Comply with NFPA 70/ANSI C1 "National Electrical Code" for
electrical components incorporated into the vehicle washing equipment.
Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's model numbers may be shown in the Contract Documents for
convenience in identifying certain vehicle washing equipment. Unless modified by notation in the
Contract Documents, the model number description for the indicated model number constitutes
requirements for that item of vehicle washing equipment.
a.
The use of model numbers, and the specific requirements set forth in the Contract
Documents are not intended to preclude use of any other acceptable manufacturer's
product which may be equivalent, but are given for the purpose of establishing a
minimum standard of design, function, and quality of materials, construction, and
workmanship.
E.
The wash system and its supporting equipment shall be designed and installed by one supplier in order
to maintain quality control.
F.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be built into other work for
the installation of vehicle washing equipment and related work. Coordinate delivery with other work
to avoid delay.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver vehicle washing equipment to Project site in original unopened containers or packages, with
manufacturer's labels, and instructions intact and legible.
B.
Contractor is to unload, handle, store, and protect vehicle washing equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
2466 60
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 3
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Wash system manufacturer shall coordinate equipment layout and installation with other work,
including sectional overhead doors, operators, and controls, and with floor drains.
B.
Wash system manufacturer shall coordinate locations and requirements of service utility connections.
C.
Wash system manufacturer shall coordinate size, location, and requirements of concrete bases, trench
drains, and positive slopes to drains.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer of each item specified,
agreeing to repair or replace vehicle washing equipment or their components that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period.
a.
Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
In addition to the standard warranty the manufacturer shall perform preventive
maintenance inspection 3 months after start up of the equipment; this inspection shall
include labor, travel and lodging if applicable.
c.
In addition to the standard warranty the manufacturer shall provide a monthly walk thru
inspection on the equipment during the warranty period, 1 year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER
A.
Equipment designed for this project is manufactured by:
HYDRO CHEM SYSTEMS, INC.
5550 CLAY AVE SW
GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49548
800 666 1992
www.hcsclean.com
Representative: Keith Bailey
B.
The use of Hydro Chem Systems Inc. catalog/model numbers, and the specific requirements set forth
herein and on the drawings are not intended to preclude the use of another manufacturer's products or
procedures, but are given for the purpose of establishing a minimum standard of design and quality for
materials, construction and workmanship.
C.
Equipment offered as an alternative to the equipment specified must be identical in both function and
installation. The drawings have been based on the equipment manufactured by Hydro Chem Systems
Inc., if the contractor it elects to use equipment manufactured by another manufacturer they must
assume full financial responsibility for any changes that occur as a result of the change. The financial
responsibility shall include any changes for the general construction, plumbing, mechanical, electrical,
and any architectural or engineering work incurred as a result of the change.
2466 60
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 4
2.2
TOUCHLESS IN BAY DRIVE THRU AUTOMATIC VEHICLE WASH SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A.
Design Requirements:
1.
2466 60
Sequence of Operation:
a.
This system is specified as a drive thru wash being able to completely wash in less than 3
minutes. The wash shall utilize a single alkaline detergent cleaning method to breakdown
and remove soils without the use of any brushes or friction devices touching the vehicle.
b.
This system will recognize the fleet’s current start up control, “RFID”, and begin a wash
sequence.
c.
The operation and startup of this system shall be automatic. The vehicle wash equipment
supplier shall install a magnetic vehicle loop sensor outside the entrance door and make
the wash process with the doors opening and closing totally automatic. The vehicle wash
equipment supplier shall be responsible for the installation of safety devices to ensure the
wash does not start without the entrance door fully open and the rinse shall not start
unless the exit door is fully open. Also thru the control panel shall be a menu to control
the automatic doors. In the winter (automatic) mode, doors shall open and close. In the
manual mode the doors shall open but not close after the wash.
d.
Vehicle to be washed pulls up to the entrance of the wash bay and in clear site shall be 3
streetlights at the entrance. Lights shall be; RED – VEHICLE IN BAY OR TANKS
FILLING, YELLOW – APPROACH START PAD/ACTIVATE WASH, and GREEN –
ENTER WASH SLOWLY.
e.
After system has performed a check of all devices and a vehicle to be washed drives into
the wash bay the detergent arch system will start automatically. The detergent arch shall
use fixed side manifolds for the application of the detergent on the top and sides of the
vehicle.
f.
A separate rear detergent manifold located in the arch shall apply detergent at double
strength to the rear of the vehicle after the vehicle has passed the arch.
g.
The vehicle shall drive thru at the rate of 1 foot per second. To assist the drivers in their
speed shall be pacing lights spaced out ten foot from each other along the driver’s side of
the bay. These lights shall be low voltage LED style.
h.
The drivers will continue their trip to the loop sensor just prior to the rinse arch.
arch shall use water from the 1000 gallon cone bottom reclaim rinse water tank.
i.
In the rinse section of the wash it shall consist of a undercarriage module, front/side/top
blaster arch, and wheel spinners for advanced cleaning of the wheel hubs.
j.
After the vehicle passes the rinse arch a separate intensified rear manifold shall activate
and provide an intensified rinse to the rear of the vehicle.
k.
The last stage shall be a fresh water rinse arch to flood the vehicle with fresh water to
rinse the reclaim water off of the vehicle.
l.
After the wash is complete the system shall reset itself ready for the next wash. In the
automatic doors mode the wash system shall close the exit door.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
This
111142 5
2.
Supply Water
a.
3.
1.2
The facility will have a limited water supply volume and pressure. The wash system
manufacturer shall be what is necessary to store and pressurize water required for their
wash.
Wash System Performance
a.
Operation: The vehicle washer shall be actuated in cycle sequence by vehicles driven in
a fixed path between tire guides at a slow speed (50 60 feet/minute) through the washing
system. All washing operations shall be fully automatic activated by the vehicle driving
through.
b.
The vehicle wash equipment supplier is responsible to design the equipment to
adequately wash up to 20 vehicles per hour. The vehicle wash shall be able to remove all
visible, heavy dirt accumulation and most of the road film from the Owner’s vehicles
when they are driven thru the washer at 50 feet/minute with using only alkaline
detergents. The amount of detergent used per vehicle to remove road film shall not
exceed 0.25 gallons.
c.
The evaluation of the system capability to remove road film shall be determined only
after the vehicle has dried after washing has been complete.
d.
The manufacturer supplier must do a preventive maintenance inspection 3 months after
the initial start up and provide free on line diagnostics (Internet access by owner) during
the warranty period. The wash system manufacturer shall also provide a monthly walk
thru inspection during the warranty period, 12 months.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard vehicle washing equipment systems modified as required to
suit Project conditions. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components,
published by manufacturer as included in standard pre engineered vehicle washing equipment systems
and as required for a complete system.
B.
Detergent System:
1.
2.
Detergent Arch:
a.
Manufacturer’s standard design, arch manufactured from stainless steel or aluminum
materials with support legs. The arch is to be attached to the concrete floor slab with
stainless steel anchors.
b.
Timing of operation and position of the detergent arch shall be determined be the
manufacturer to provide optimum detergent penetration before high pressure wash cycle.
Detergent Manifolds:
a.
2466 60
Constructed using stainless steel pipe or Schedule 80 PVC using nozzles that are
constructed of a chemically coupled, glass reinforced engineering grade of polypropylene
that combines strength and durability with chemical resistance. A Viton O ring is used to
provide a positive seal between the body and the tip of the nozzle. The nozzle shall
utilize a pressure check to eliminate wasted detergents draining from the arch.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 6
3.
4.
2466 60
b.
Top/side spray manifolds manufactured per the bidders standard designs. Detergent
manifolds shall be designed to evenly apply detergent, warm water solution to top and
sides, of the vehicle proceeding through the arch. The design shall allow immediate
activation of the nozzles upon arch activation by the vehicle.
c.
Intensified rear detergent spray manifold manufactured per the vehicle wash equipment
manufacturer’s standard designs. Detergent shall be applied to the rear of the vehicle via
a separate rear spray manifold that is activated immediately after the vehicle has passed
through the front/side spray manifold. The detergent concentration for the rear wash arch
shall be double compared to the front/side manifold. The intensified rear detergent spray
manifold shall be controlled and operated via its own vehicle sensing device, solenoid
valves and chemical pumps to prevent spraying except on the rear of the vehicle.
Booster Pump:
a.
The pump shall be a stainless steel multi stage centrifugal pump. The 208 Volt TEFC, 3
Phase, 3 HP pump and shall maintain 80 psi to the detergent module and final rinse arch.
An appropriately sized motor starter shall be supplied.
b.
A 225 gallon storage tank shall be provided to store the required water to be pressurized.
Appropriate fill and low level sensors to be provided by the wash manufacturer.
c.
Pressure regulating devices and bladder tanks to be supplied by the wash manufacturer.
Hot Water Heater – Natural Gas
a.
The water heater shall be a sealed combustion unit having an input rating of 150,000
Btu/hr. The WATER HEATER shall be capable of full modulation firing down to 20% of
rated input with a turn down ratio of 5:1. The water heater shall be designed for up to
95% thermal efficiency.
b.
The WATER HEATER shall consist of a direct fired stainless steel heat exchanger
mounted on top of a glass lined storage tank in a fashion that will reduce the amount of
scale build up that is known to reduce efficiency. The WATER HEATER shall have no
visible pipes that connect the heat exchanger to the storage tank.
c.
The WATER HEATER shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly,
primed and pre painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and
completely enclosed, independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the
outer jacket does not affect a proper seal. A burner/flame observation port shall be
provided. The burner shall be a premix design and constructed of high temperature
stainless steel with a woven metal fiber outer covering to provide modulating firing rates.
The WATER HEATER shall be supplied with a gas valve designed with negative
pressure regulation and be equipped with a variable speed blower system, to precisely
control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating WATER HEATER firing rates for
maximum efficiency. The WATER HEATER shall operate in a safe condition at a de
rated output with gas supply pressures as low as 4 inches of water column.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 7
C.
Rinse System:
1.
Rinse Arch:
a.
2.
Wheel Cleaning:
a.
3.
4.
a.
The pump shall be a stainless steel multi stage centrifugal pump. This pump shall be set
up to operate at an efficiency rating at least 75%. The pump shall be specified as ODP
and 208 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 HP pump, it shall deliver approximately 230 GPM @ 330 PSI
to the rinse arch.
b.
This pump is to be supplied with 1 corrosion resistant 1000 gallon cone bottom holding
tank and automatic fill valve. There shall be a low water shutoff sensor to eliminate the
possibility of the rinse pump running dry. There shall also be a sensor to prohibit a wash
cycle from starting if the tank does not have an adequate supply of water for that wash.
An appropriately sized motor starter shall be supplied.
Guide Rails:
Waste water reclaim shall recover a min of 90 gallons per minute. The reclaim system
shall control automatic purge valves for removing settled solids from the cone bottom
tank to the initial solids separation tank. The reclaim system shall be a skid mounted. This
Auto Clean Process Module shall utilize a VFD controller and motor. Unit shall be
designed with a continuous duty process pump; Mass Air Recirc will be used to prevent
orders. Waste water shall be cleaned to a minimum of 15 microns.
Final Rinse Arch (using Fresh Water):
a.
b.
2466 60
Guide rails are to be made out of 4” diameter powder coated safety yellow steel pipe.
Provide guide rails for protection around the arches as shown on the prints. Mounting
shall be done with ¾” anchors.
Reclaim System:
a.
6.
Additional emphasis must be made for additional cleaning of the wheels. This should be
done by maintenance free wheel spinners.
Rinse Pump:
a.
5.
The arch shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. The arch shall be mounted to
the floor using stainless steel anchors. Its design shall incorporate the use of stainless
steel nozzles per the manufacturer’s specifications. This rinse arch must have the ability
to adjust the volume and impingement pressure on the vehicle surface. The nozzles shall
be made of stainless steel.
The arch shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. The arch shall be mounted to
the floor using stainless steel anchors. Its design shall incorporate the use of PVDF
nozzles per the manufacturer’s specifications.
This arch shall be fed from the booster pump. Automatic operation by the wash
equipment supplier.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 8
D.
E.
Intensified Rear Wash System:
b.
The vehicle wash system manufacturer shall guarantee that the rear of the vehicle passing
thru the system at the speed of 50 feet/min shall be cleaned equally effectively as the rest
of the vehicle.
c.
The rear wash arch shall be activated only for the rear of the vehicle and shall
immediately (automatically) shut off after the vehicle has passed. The industrial valve(s)
required for this diverting of water shall be provided by the wash system supplier.
d.
The rear wash arch shall use either rotating spinners, oscillating zero degree nozzles or
other manufacturer selected method for effective rear wash arrangement. The vehicle
wash equipment manufacturer is solely responsible for the performance warranty
regardless of the chosen method.
Chassis wash system shall provide rinsing of the underside of the vehicle while the arch is on.
Control Package
1.
2466 60
The Intensified Rear Wash System shall be activated after the vehicle passes the high
pressure rinse arch. The separate rear wash manifold shall be made of minimum of 2”
Schedule 40 galvanized piping (or per manufacturer’s standard designs) with a minimum
output flow rate of 180 GPM at 380 PSI.
Undercarriage / Chassis Wash System:
1.
F.
a.
Master Control Panel:
a.
This panel shall be a 115 Volt Master Control Panel (MCP) to regulate all operations of
the wash system. The panel shall be designed to meet the requirements of the National
Electric Code, Articles 430 and 670, NFPA Standard 70 and shall utilize components
with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) rating.
b.
The MCP shall be PLC based driven. The use of PC/Windows/Linux will not be accepted
as a substitution.
c.
This system shall incorporate additional protection by using PELV (Protective Extra Low
Voltage) for all outputs from this panel. If a manufacturer chooses to use high voltage
controls, they will be responsible for Electrical Contractor costs to install them.
d.
An Ethernet modem shall be located inside the MCP to enable remote electrical trouble
shooting and to change programming. Ethernet and dedicated IP address will be provided
by Owner.
e.
MCP must be capable of monitoring wash counts as well as run time on detergent water
pump, and rinse pump. MCP must also track occurrences of troubles such as low water
shutdowns. Reports of all trouble occurrences, hours of runtime, wash counts, and wash
costs must be submitted to the Owner on a monthly basis during the warranty period.
f.
This system must have a display panel that indicates the wash count, pump hours, and
monitoring of all devices controlled by the MCP. This touchscreen panel shall also
provide easy troubleshooting of the wash system. The screen shall provide monitoring of
all input sensors, output devices.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 9
2.
3.
g.
The Touchscreen panel shall also provide the ability to individually turn on all devices of
the wash system controlled by the MCP. This feature shall have a password protection for
the end user.
h.
System shall be programmed to accommodate a control signal to actuate the wash for the
owners start up control, (RFID).
Low Voltage Street Lights and Signs:
a.
Low voltage streetlights shall be at the entrance of the wash. These streetlights shall be
24 Volts. At the entrance shall be a “Tanks Filling/Vehicle in Bay” (RED) light when a
wash is in progress or the tanks may be filling enough to allow the next wash to occur
without water loss, “Approach Start Pad/Activate Wash” (YELLOW) alerting the drivers
the wash is ready for activation of the next wash, and “Enter Wash” (GREEN) light to
alert the driver the entrance door are all the way up and the system is starting and to enter
bay. Appropriate signs shall accompany these lights to instruct the driver.
b.
Driver pace lights (6) shall be intense low voltage LED's. The lights shall be mounted
along the driver side wall spaced approximately 10 foot from each other. Mounting height
is 7 foot A.F.F.
Integration of Overhead Door Controls to MCP:
a.
G.
Vehicle Loop Detector System: Provide manufacturer’s standard magnetic detector designed to detect
presence or transit of a vehicle, over an embedded loop of wire. This system shall emit a signal
activating or deactivating the vehicle wash system. Provide the number of loops consisting of multiple
strands of wire, number of wire turns, loop size, and method of location on the drawings submitted
with your bid. The use of limit switches or photo eyes for detecting the vehicle is prohibited.
a.
H.
2466 60
The vehicle wash equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for automating the
entrance and exit doors, this automating process will include opening and closing the
doors. The door openers and standard controls are to be provided by door manufacturer.
Photo eye protection using separate transmitter and receiver type photo eyes, shall also be
provided by the door manufacturer. This requirement is to prevent the doors from closing
in the event someone or something is in the path of the door. The use of a pressure strip
will not meet this requirement but can be used in conjunction with the photo eyes.
The wash system manufacture is responsible for the complete installation of the loop
sensors in the concrete provided with the wash system. Wiring to the loops will be
provided by the electrical contractor.
Cleaning Chemicals: Equipment supplier shall provide training on the system, and 200 gallons of
detergent with the system.
a.
The cleaning detergents shall be formulated for cleaning of exterior of vehicles in a
touchless vehicle wash system and be able to remove light oils, most road film and
general soils.
b.
The cleaning detergents shall be safe on painted surfaces and ferrous and non ferrous
metals and shall have no adverse effect on the health of personnel, vehicle surfaces, or the
wash bay equipment when used in accordance with the specified safe handling and use
procedures.
c.
The cleaning detergent(s) will have no flash point and contain no phosphates, no phenols
or butyls.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 10
d.
I.
The cleaning detergent(s) shall be able to satisfactorily wash all of the Owner’s vehicles.
The vehicle wash with the proposed cleaning detergent(s) shall be able to remove all
visible, heavy dirt accumulation and most of the road films the vehicles when they are
driven through the washer at one foot per second.
Pressure Washing System:
1.
Hose Reel – Hannay with Super Swivel for use with existing pressure washing system
QTY 1
a.
75' hose to be provided, with variable pressure wand, relax action gun and SS holster.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.1
INSPECTION
A.
Coordinate location of rough in work and utility stub outs to assure match with equipment to be
installed.
B.
Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather. Compare delivered
equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all equipment items and specified
accessories.
C.
Report in writing to the Architect, any damaged, missing or incomplete scheduled equipment, and
improper rough in work or utility stub outs.
2.2
INSTALLATION
A.
The wash system manufacturer shall install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings, and
manufacturer’s instructions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.3
Place vehicle wash equipment after finishes has been completed in each area.
Positioning: Place equipment in accordance with positioning requirements set level, plumb and
at right angles to adjacent work.
Fitting: Where field cutting or trimming is necessary, perform in a neat, accurate, professional
manner without damaging equipment or adjacent work.
Anchorage: Attach equipment to floors and walls with type of anchors and fasteners
recommended by equipment manufacturer for type of substrate indicated to be secured to.
Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.
Mechanical and Electrical connections shall be by others.
Equipment supplier shall undertake the commissioning of the system and make all required
adjustments to ensure proper operation.
The owner’s personnel shall be trained on site for a minimum of five hours in the system
operation and maintenance.
Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 3 hours' normal travel time from the Installer's place of
business to the Project site.
EQUIPMENT UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A.
Mechanical Interconnecting Plumbing:
1.
2.
2466 60
Utility requirements and interconnecting for the wash system of water, gas, compressed air, and
exhaust stack venting shall be provided by the plumbing and mechanical contractor.
Equipment detergent chemical lines shall be supplied and installed by vehicle wash equipment
installer.
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 11
B.
Electrical Interconnecting Wiring:
1.
2.
2.4
Utility requirements and interconnecting of all high and low voltage devices shall be provided
by the Electrical Contractor.
All wash system indicator lights and controls shall be low voltage.
START UP AND TESTING
A.
After final connections are made the start up shall be performed by the wash system manufacturer in
the presence of the Owner.
B.
Prior to release of final payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with specification
in the presence of the Owner using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.
C.
Equipment shall not damage vehicles, including antennas, mirrors, windshield wipers and windows, or
equipment itself.
D.
Make a final check of each vehicle washing equipment operation with Owner's personnel present and
before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning
properly.
2.5
CLEANUP
A.
Touch up damage to painted finishes.
B.
Wipe and clean equipment of any oil, grease and solvents, and make ready for use.
C.
Clean area around equipment installation and remove packing or installation debris from job site.
D.
Notify Architect or designated representative for acceptance inspection.
2.6
TRAINING
A.
Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operation, and daily maintenance of vehicle washing
equipment. Review emergency provisions, including procedures to be followed at time of operational
failure. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures
or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete vehicle washing equipment
maintenance program.
B.
The Owner’s personnel shall be trained for a minimum of 5 hours in the system operation and
maintenance.
END OF SECTION 111142
2466 60
VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
111142 12
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 133419
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Structural steel framing.
Metal roof panels.
Metal wall panels.
Thermal insulation.
Accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of metal building system component.
B.
Shop Drawings: For metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D.
Delegated Design Submittal: For metal building systems indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Metal Building System Certificates:
manufacturer.
1.
Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2466 60
For each type of metal building system, from
Name and location of Project.
Order number.
Name of manufacturer.
Name of Contractor.
Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.
Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot rolled steel and AISI standards
for cold rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard.
Governing building code and year of edition.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 1
h.
i.
j.
k.
Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load,
deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective
peak velocity related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes).
Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with
concentrated loads, according to governing building code.
Building Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load
importance factors.
AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building
system and components were designed and produced in an AISC Certified Facility
by an AISC Certified Manufacturer.
G.
Maintenance data.
H.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA.
1.
2.
AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC Certified Manufacturer that designs and
produces metal building systems and components in an AISC Certified Facility.
Engineering Responsibility:
Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to
manufacturer.
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code Steel."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel."
D.
Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for
design requirements and allowable stresses.
E.
Cold Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of
Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses.
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration
of factory applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
2466 60
Finish Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
American Buildings Company.
Butler Manufacturing Company; a BlueScope Steel company.
Ceco Building Systems; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P.
Nucor Building Systems.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's
standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system
capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure
to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior.
1.
B.
Provide metal building system of size and with bay spacings, roof slopes, and spans
indicated.
Primary Frame Type:
1.
Rigid Clear Span: Solid member, structural framing system without interior columns.
C.
End Wall Framing: Engineer end walls to be expandable. Provide primary frame, capable of
supporting full bay design loads, and end wall columns.
D.
Secondary Frame Type:
(bypass) girts.
E.
Eave Height: 20 feet.
F.
Bay Spacing: as indicated on Drawings.
G.
Roof Slope: as indicated on Drawings.
H.
Roof System:
insulation.
I.
Exterior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard tapered rib, exposed fastener metal wall
panels with field installed insulation.
2466 60
Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior framed
Manufacturer's standard lap seam metal roof panels with field installed
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 3
2.3
METAL BUILDING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Delegated Design: Design metal building system, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall be designed according to procedures in
MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual."
1.
2.
Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings or as required by MBMA's "Metal Building
Systems Manual."
Deflection Limits: Design metal building system assemblies to withstand design loads
with deflections no greater than the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Drift Limits: Engineer building structure to withstand design loads with drift limits no
greater than the following:
a.
4.
Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span.
Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span.
Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary framing
and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.
Lateral Drift: Maximum of 1/200 of the building height.
Metal panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASTM E 1592.
C.
Seismic Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
E.
Air Infiltration for Metal Roof and Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not
more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test
pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
F.
Water Penetration for Metal Roof and Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested
according to ASTM E 1646 at test pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft..
G.
Wind Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
Class 90.
2466 60
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 4
2.4
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
A.
General: Provide manufacturer’s standard galvanized structural steel framing members at
locations indicated on Drawings.
B.
Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary framing system, designed to withstand
required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean to
frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end wall, and corner columns;
and wind bracing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members.
Factory drill for field bolted assembly.
Frame Configuration: Single gable.
Exterior Column Type: Tapered.
Rafter Type: Tapered.
C.
End Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end wall framing fabricated for field
bolted assembly.
D.
Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave
struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other
miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either
cold formed, structural steel sheet or roll formed, metallic coated steel sheet, prepainted with
coil coating.
E.
Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural framing components that are primed or finish
painted. Provide zinc plated or hot dip galvanized bolts for structural framing components that
are galvanized.
F.
Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
2.5
METAL ROOF PANELS
A.
Tapered Rib Profile, Lap Seam Metal Roof Panels : Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs
and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be
installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports
using exposed fasteners in side laps.
1.
Material: Aluminum zinc alloy coated steel sheet, 26 gauge nominal thickness.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
2466 60
Exterior Finish: Siliconized polyester.
Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
Major Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c.
Panel Coverage: 36 inches.
Panel Height: 1.25 inches.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 5
2.6
METAL WALL PANELS
A.
Tapered Rib Profile Exposed Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal
major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed
to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to
supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.
1.
Material: Aluminum zinc alloy coated steel sheet, 26 gauge nominal thickness.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Exterior Finish: Siliconized polyester.
Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
Major Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c.
Panel Coverage: 36 inches.
Panel Height: 1.25 inches.
THERMAL INSULATION
A.
Unfaced Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type I, or NAIMA 202, glass fiber blanket
insulation; 0.5 lb/cu. ft. density; 6 inch wide, continuous, vapor tight edge tabs; with a flame
spread index of 25 or less.
1.
Vapor Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater than 0.02 perm
when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method.
a.
2.8
Composition: White polypropylene film facing, fiberglass scrim reinforcement,
and manufacturer’s standard backing.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as
specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
1.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
B.
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel
assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel
assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless
otherwise indicated.
2466 60
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 6
D.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 26 gauge nominal thickness, metallic coated steel sheet or
aluminum zinc alloy coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent
metal panels.
E.
Gutters: Formed from 0.022 inch nominal thickness, metallic coated steel sheet or aluminum
zinc alloy coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake
trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special
pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long sections, sized according to SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
1.
2.
F.
Downspouts: Formed from 0.022 inch nominal thickness, zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet
or aluminum zinc alloy coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal
wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10 foot long sections, complete with formed elbows and
offsets.
1.
G.
2.9
Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.
Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets.
Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.
Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy
assembly.
1.
2.
Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared
erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.
Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of
proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.
B.
Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and
erection tolerances.
C.
Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section, with baseplates,
bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form,
punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.
D.
Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section by roll forming or
break forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection
welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field
connections to primary framing.
E.
Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements.
Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural
requirements.
2466 60
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A.
Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and
erection drawings.
B.
Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building
system manufacturer's professional engineer.
C.
Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
D.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
2.
F.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage resistant grouts.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure will be completed and in service.
Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line.
Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double
nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base line
elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.
1.
Make field connections using high strength bolts installed according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for bolt type and
joint type specified.
a.
G.
Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt
secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing.
1.
2.
3.
2466 60
Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.
Provide rake or gable purlins with tight fitting closure channels and fasciae.
Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.
Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows,
louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 8
H.
Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.
1.
2.
Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag.
Locate interior end bay bracing only where indicated.
I.
Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to
carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and
electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.
3.2
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings
as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel
finishes.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing
by manufacturer.
Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated.
Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar
elements. Fasten with self tapping screws.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in
alignment.
Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
Lap Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque
adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or
metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
1.
Arrange and nest side lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints.
Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated
items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to
line.
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion resistant coating, by
applying rubberized asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
D.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
2466 60
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 9
1.
2.
3.3
Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations.
1.
2.
B.
Lap Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with exposed fasteners at
each lapped joint, at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.4
Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with
self tapping screws.
Provide metal backed sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on
weather side of metal roof panels.
Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and
protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather side surface of fastenings on end
laps and on side laps of nesting type metal panels, on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal
panels, and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains.
At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6 inch end lap, sealed with butyl
rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self
drilling or self tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae
meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2466 60
Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib
lined up with line of framing.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum.
When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable
panels over metal wall panels at eave height.
Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter
of all openings. Fasten with self tapping screws.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 10
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
3.5
Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete, and elsewhere as indicated; or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self drilling or
self tapping screws.
Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels
to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to
cover entire surface, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method:
1.
2.
C.
Between Purlin Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins.
Carry vapor retarder facing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping adjoining facing of next
insulation course and maintaining continuity of retarder. Hold in place with bands and
crossbands below insulation.
Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and
taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top
flange of secondary framing. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing.
1.
3.6
Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder toward warm side of construction
unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces except for firestopping.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
the surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
Install factory laminated, vapor retarder faced blankets straight and true in one piece
lengths, with both sets of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder.
Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and
taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place
according to manufacturers' written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and
other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal
wall panels.
B.
Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames according to SDI A250.8.
C.
Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
2466 60
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 11
D.
Door Hardware: Mount units at heights indicated in DHI's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Install surface mounted items after finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl rubber sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion resistant coating, by applying
rubberized asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1.
2.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in
waterproof and weather resistant performance.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints
of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
C.
Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to
eave with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 inches o.c.
using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
Provide for thermal expansion.
D.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1 1/2 inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to
hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at
approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
2466 60
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 12
1.
E.
Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to
panel as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 133419
2466 60
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 13
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 145550
PORTABLE VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Vehicle lifts including safety equipment, controls and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
ALI: Automotive Lift Institute.
B.
ANSI/ALI ALCTV: Safety Requirements for the Construction, Testing, and
Validation of Automotive Lifts.
C.
International Standards Organization (ISO): ISO 9001 Quality management systems
Requirements.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): UL201 These requirements cover garage
equipment, rated not more than 600 volts, for use in accordance with the National
Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation manual.
4.
Operations manual.
5.
Maintenance manual.
6.
Safety manual.
B.
Shop Drawings: Template drawings and load reactions for lift application.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Factory trained authorized company.
2.
Company insured for completed operations of installing lift.
B.
In addition to the other requirements outlined herein, the lift or lifts, shall comply
with all applicable requirements of ANSI standards. "Safety Requirements for the
Construction, Care and Use of Automotive Lifts " as published by the American
national Standards Institute. The lift company Quality Management System shall be
ISO9001 certified.
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 1
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
WARRANTY
A.
Contractor/manufacturer/installer has responsibility for an extended Corrective
Period for work of this Section for the period stated from date of Substantial
Completion against deficiencies as stated in the manufacturer's standard warranty.
B.
Contractor/manufacturer/installer shall promptly and without inconvenience and
cost to Owner correct said deficiencies:
1.
Failure due to defective materials and workmanship.
C.
Contractor/manufacturer/installer shall be notified immediately of defective
products, and be given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return.
Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized
repairs or labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: ROTARY MODEL: MACH 4
B.
Substitutions: Architects approved equal
72,000 LB./108,000 LB. CAPACITY SURFACE MOUNTED WHEEL ENGAGING
MOBILE COLUMN LIFTS MACH 4 SERIES
A.
Lift Characteristics:
1.
The intent of this specification is to establish the minimum standards of
quality and performance for portable mobile column lifts which will be used
to lift a variety of vehicles including Trucks, Buses, Passenger Vehicles, Fork
Lifts and other general service vehicles. This specification shall describe a
mobile column surface mounted, wheel engaging lifting system designed to
elevate vehicles for the purpose of inspection and maintenance. Lifting
System shall consist of four electric hydraulic mobile columns sustaining
72,000 lb (32659 kgs) capacities (18,000 lbs (8165 kgs) per mobile column).
Mobile columns may be added, (not exceeding 8 columns), removed, or
changed out. All mobile columns shall operate synchronously from any one
of the lifting units by means of a control interface. The control system shall
have replaceable printed circuit boards equipped with quick connect
electrical couplers. The mobile columns shall be battery operated with a DC
charging system built into each column for easy recharge and communication
cable cord reel for cable management.
B.
MACH 4 Series – 4 Mobile Columns: Capacity 72,000 lbs (32659 kg); 18,000 lbs.
(8165 kg) per column.
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 2
2466 60
C.
Shipping Weight: 1485 lbs (674 kg).
D.
Weight Per Column: 1400 lbs. (635 kg).
E.
Lifting Fork Length: 14 inches (356 mm) forks accommodate rim sizes 9 inches
(229 mm) minimum to 24 1/2 inches (622 mm) maximum.
F.
Floor requirements 4 1/2 inches thick (minimum) 3000 psi concrete not to exceed a
side to side floor slope of 1/8 inch = 1 foot 0 inches and not to exceed a 1/4 inch = 1
foot 0 inches floor slope fore and aft.
G.
Motor: 3 kw, 24 volt minimum.
H.
Hydraulic Tank Capacity: 10.5 quarts (10 liters) mobile columns will require 11
1/2 quarts (11 liters) of fluid to fill tank, hoses, and cylinders. Bio Fluid
compatible.
I.
Overall Height at Full Lower: 102 inches (2591 mm).
J.
Overall Height at Full Rise: 144 3/8 inches (3677 mm).
K.
Overall Width: 45 1/2 inches (1156 mm).
L.
Overall Length: 48 9/16 inches (1234 mm).
M.
Turning Radius: 45 inches (1143 mm).
N.
Rise: 70 inches (1778 mm).
O.
Lifting/Lowering Speed: 78 seconds to full rise 54 seconds to fully lowered
position.
P.
Control Voltage: 24 volts DC. Rechargeable by 110 Volt Automatic Weather Tight
Marine Charger.
Q.
Battery Charge Cycle: (New Battery) 15 20 cycles per charge at rated load of the
lift.
R.
Fabrication:
1.
Column Assemblies:
a.
Columns shall be constructed of formed channel fabrication from a
single steel plate and shall not require welded seams to form the
column structure.
b.
Columns shall be further reinforced externally along their back face
with structural steel angle for additional rigidity and extended service
life. Rigid column design shall be protected from corrosion via sand
blasted enamel painting of metal surfaces.
c.
Each column shall be fabricated to a set of legs that will sit directly on
the floor and provide a stable platform when lifting a load. When
unloaded the mobile columns ride on a set of wheels to allow the units
to be moved. When a vehicle is lifted, the wheels shall automatically
retract and the lift shall sit down flat on its steel base and no lifted
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 3
2.
3.
2466 60
weight shall remain on the casters. Legs have an extended fork
configuration that allows for extensions to be added at any time. Such
extensions will permit the addition of longer forks to lift dual wheel
assemblies or optional assemblies for lifting vehicles further away
form the column assembly.
d.
Each of the lifting units shall contain a mechanical locking latch
mechanism completely separate from the drive of lifting system. This
lock shall be gravity actuated with a spring loaded assist to ensure
engagement at any position. Spacing between locking positions shall
be a maximum of 3 inches (76 mm) in accordance with ALCTV 2006.
e.
The column structures shall be easily moveable on three wheels
consisting of two fixed heavy duty steel wheels and a dual rubber
steering wheel mounted at the rear of the column. Columns shall come
equipped with a hoisting hook for lifting by overhead crane and a fork
lift pocket lifting points on each column for ease of relocation by
standard fork lift.
Carriage Assemblies:
a.
Each column assembly shall include a carriage assembly which
consists of 4 Ultra High Molecular Weight (UHMW) roller bearings.
These bearings shall be oil impregnated and shall not require any
greasing or maintenance of any kind.
b.
Each carriage assembly shall include a full enclosure for the lifting
cylinder chrome rod. No part of the chrome lifting cylinder shall be
exposed to impact at any time during the lifting stroke.
c.
Forks shall provide a minimum of 12 inches of sufficient safety
clearance between column and body of vehicle. Forks shall also be
available in an extended configuration capable of supporting inboard
tires on dual wheeled axles.
d.
Carriage assemblies shall come equipped with adjustable lifting forks
to allow for adjustment of lifting forks for small tire applications to
standard large tire applications without need for adapter sleeves. Forks
shall include handles to facilitate the lateral adjustment of forks for
narrower and wider tires. Adjustment shall be accomplished by release
of a spring loaded lock on the top of the fork. When adjustment of the
forks is complete, locks shall automatically re engage to secure forks
from further movement.
Hydraulic System:
a.
Each lifting unit shall be equipped with an electric hydraulic power
unit, consisting of a DC motor, gear pump, reservoir, check valve,
pressure relief valve, and two control valves. Entire power unit totally
enclosed to protect from dirt and water.
b.
The direct drive lifting cylinder shall be installed in such a manner as
to push the carriage up, using no chains or cables. The extension of the
cylinder shall occur inside of the carriage as to keep the plunger of the
cylinder protected from dirt, sand, or any possible mechanical damage.
c.
Hydraulic check valve shall hold load at any position of the cylinder.
Redundant mechanical safety lock shall be continuously engaged
except while lift is being lowered.
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 4
d.
4.
5.
2.3
Solid zinc plated steel pipes are used to circulate all hydraulic fluids in
the system.
e.
Pressure relief valve shall prevent overloading of the lifting unit.
f.
Unit shall be equipped with two control valves that shall be used to
maintain synchronous operation when a lifting system of more than
one column is being commanded to raise or lower.
g.
Hydraulic system is self lubricating and shall require little to no
maintenance.
h.
A velocity fuse shall be installed directly to the end of the cylinder in
order to keep hydraulic fluids from discharging if there is a fast leak
somewhere after the cylinder, which could cause the load to
unintentionally be lowered.
Steering:
a.
The steering assembly shall consist of a fully automatic, spring loaded
steering handle. The steering handle shall lock the movement of the
rear wheel when it is in the vertical position.
b.
The steering assembly shall allow the lift to be moved around the shop
floor without the need to pump up a hydraulic jack or pallet jack
mechanism.
c.
The rear wheel shall be spring loaded as to retract when weight is
applied to the column. All other wheels will automatically retract
when the lift is loaded with the weight of a vehicle. All wheels shall
be equipped with sealed ball bearings.
Lift shall be 3rd party certified by ETL testing laboratory and labeled with
the ETL/Automotive Lift Institute (ALI) label that affirms the lifts meet
conformance to all applicable provisions of American National Standard
ANSI/ALI ALCTV 2006 and in compliance with IBC 2003, IBC 2006
chapter 30 section 3001.2.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Jack Stands: Provide manufacturer standard jack stands with spring loaded caster
wheels.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until supporting structures have been properly prepared.
B.
If supporting structure preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
INSTALLATION
A.
2466 60
Install in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 5
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
Touch up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion
END OF SECTION 144550
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 6
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 155550
IN GROUND VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
Lift shall consist of two individual lifting assemblies in line with the longitudinal
axis of the vehicle, each lifting cylinder so equipped as to engage the axle,
suspension, as specified herein. One of the two lifting cylinder assemblies will be
movable along this same axis to effect variable spacing between the lifting cylinder
assemblies. The front movable unit will herein after be referred to as the "front
post" and the stationary unit will be called the "rear post."
REFERENCES
A.
In addition to the other requirements outlined herein, the lift or lifts, shall comply
with the requirements of ANSI/ALI ALCTV 1998, American National standard for
Automotive Lifts "Safety Requirements for the Construction, Testing and
Validation," as published by the American National Standards Institute. The lift
must be certified by the American Lift Institute. The lift manufacturer and the
installer shall be ISO – 9000 certified.
B.
Scope of Work: The lift supplier/installer shall be responsible for the complete
scope of work involving the lift installation. Labor, material and equipment
necessary for the pit construction, lay out and setting in place of the concrete
embeds, excavation and construction of the rear assembly containment vault,
placement of the sub grade pipe chases, stub out of the sump pump drain piping
(connection to an oil water separator; by others), and set in place and piping of the
power unit (electrical wiring; by others), all to be included in the lift installers scope
of work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation manual.
4.
Operations manual.
5.
Maintenance manual.
6.
Safety manual.
B.
Shop Drawings: Template drawings and load reactions for lift application.
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 1
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Factory trained authorized company.
2.
Company insured for completed operations of installing lift.
B.
In addition to the other requirements outlined herein, the lift or lifts, shall comply
with all applicable requirements of ANSI standards. "Safety Requirements for the
Construction, Care and Use of Automotive Lifts " as published by the American
national Standards Institute. The lift company Quality Management System shall be
ISO9001 certified.
C.
An installation operation service manual and complete repair parts list showing
illustrations of individual components shall be made available by the manufacturer.
Verify dimensions of pit and spaces, as constructed, before fabricating and
installing lift. Examine all parts of the supporting structure and conditions under
which work is to be done.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
WARRANTY
A.
Contractor/manufacturer/installer has responsibility for an extended Corrective
Period for work of this Section for the period stated from date of Substantial
Completion against deficiencies as stated in the manufacturer's standard warranty.
B.
Contractor/manufacturer/installer shall promptly and without inconvenience and
cost to Owner correct said deficiencies:
1.
Failure due to defective materials and workmanship.
C.
Contractor/manufacturer/installer shall be notified immediately of defective
products, and be given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return.
Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized
repairs or labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: ROTARY MODEL 70P – Two Post Adjustable Axle Engaging.
Capacity: 50,000 lb (Standard Trench Design with Rear Containment)
B.
Substitutions: Architects approved equal
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 2
2.2
CAPACITY AND DIMENSIONS
A.
Capacity: 70E, electric oil, full hydraulic type. Lift shall be capable of raising
50,000 lbs. (25,000 lbs. front post, 25,000 lbs rear post) when supplied with a
sufficient amount of oil at 350 psi. Maximum. Lift hydraulic pressures higher than
350 psi are not acceptable
2.3 DESIGN REQUIRMENTS
A. Front Lifting Unit:
1. Saddle and Adapters: Saddle and adapters shall be so designed to provide width (spread)
adjustment without necessity of operator bodily getting under vehicle. Use of extension
handles, etc. is acceptable if use does not require undue agility or manipulation. Adapter
will be restrained to prevent accidental excessive extension. When front post is in the fully
lowered position, the highest point of the saddle and adapter assembly shall not be more than
6 inches above the frame guide bars and shall not drag on the floor when the post is moved
from wheel base adjustment.
2. Front Post (plunger and casing Assembly): Front post shall be equipped with a manual air
bleeder located on the casing flange, a control orifice in the oil inlet connection to insure
controlled speeds during up and down cycles, and a one piece combination packing and
wiper hydra seal assembly, not requiring adjustment or lubrication. Seal assembly shall be
designed for surface installation. The jack plunger shall be manufactured of steel pipe,
finished to 10 5/8 inches diameter and polished over its entire surface with stops electrically
welded to the bottom of the plunger to prevent it from leaving the casing. The plunger shall
be removable for inspection and/or replacement. The outer casing shall be steel pipe with
welded in bulkhead and flanges. The jack assembly shall have a removable plunger guide
with two replaceable bearing liners. The bearing liners shall be made of UHMWPE and
shall be designed to snap in position at the top and bottom of the guide. The bearing liner
shall provide minimum plunger to bearing friction for smooth operation and the bearings
spaced to insure maximum rigidity and support for design loads. Jacking units shall be
factory tested under a working pressure of 400 psi to insure adequate strength and freedom
from leaking.
3. Front Post (Carriage and Trench): The carriage which supports the front post shall be
equipped with permanent lubricated bearing wheels rolling in structural channel tracks. The
channel tracks will be essentially flush with the floor surface. Cover plates shall move with
the carriage so as to keep the trench opening covered at all times. Cover plates will be of
sufficient strength as to support a wheel loading of one quarter of the design capacity with
out permanent deformation.
B. Rear Lifting Unit:
1. Saddle and adapters: Design shall be such as to allow the saddle and the two removable
adapters to recede beneath the floor level in the fully lowered position. Hinged cover doors
shall be provided to cover recess area when lift is not in use.
2. Rear Floor Frame: The frame will provide integral wheel chocks at floor level in order to
accurately locate vehicle axles over the lifting saddle and adapters. All embedded, recessed
frame metal angles to be supplied by contractor
3. Rear casing and plunger assembly: The design requirements shall be the same as
the front plunger and casing assembly.
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 3
4. The rear post shall be installed in a containment vault consisting of a non corrosive tube
and poured concrete base with pea stone backfill. The rear access area shall be drained to
the pit with an oversized PVC sleeve for the hydraulic piping.
C. Controls:
The hydraulic control valve will be of composite design providing individual or simultaneous
control of front and rear plungers. The valve will be located in a suitable control box on the
specified side of the front frame at the extreme front at an adequate lateral distance from the
center line of the main frame to permit operation without interference from the vehicle or its
front overhang. The operating levers and handles shall be surface mounted to provide operation
without opening a cover plate or door and suitably protected against damage by accidental drive
over of a capacity size vehicle. Oil control valves shall be "deadman" type. Valve cores and
seals shall be arranged so that they may be serviced or replaced without removing valve body
from control box.
D. Lift Locks:
Front and rear lock legs shall be rated at same capacity as the corresponding jacking units.
The legs shall be of the telescoping type and constructed of 3" x 4" rectangular tubing and a
minimum wall thickness of 3/16" to prevent strut rotation out of alignment with locking
latch. Round notched struts are not acceptable. Each strut shall have a 1/2" steel plate
welded to it with a minimum of 18 locking slots spaced at 3" increments. The locking
latches shall be spring loaded to the locked position and shall be released by an air operated
cylinder with an air release button at the control location. The lift locking leg shall be
attached to the saddle to prevent rotation insuring proper location of releases at all times.
The locking leg shall prevent rotation of the piston assembly.
2.4
2.5
WHEEL BASE ADJUSTMENT
A.
Front post shall be movable to provide proper engagement with vehicles ranging in
wheel bases from 106” minimum to 304” maximum.
B.
Wheel Base Adjustment to be accomplished by a hydraulically operated motor and
chain drive assembly mounted at the front of the lift pit. Control shall be by a lever
located in the control box. A four way directional control valve to provide
forward/rearward positioning with spring return to neutral position. Hydraulic drive
motor to be rated at minimum 376 in./lbs.
ADAPTER ADJUSTMENT
A.
Adapters shall be adjustable so that they will provide a maximum spread and retract
to the following dimensions:
1.
Front (1) saddle, (2) sliding adapter bases with flip up wings for an adjustment of
40 ¾” to 17 5/8”.
2.
Rear – Same as Front
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 4
3.
2.6
Front and rear adapter package to include: 5” & 8” extensions; axle adapters &
chassis adapters, all part of the manufacturers school bus package.
RISE AND DIAMETER
A. Front Post:
1. Rise: 66 inches to contact point on adapter.
2. Diameter: 10 5/8 inches.
B. Rear Post:
1. Rise: 69 inches to contact point on adapter.
2. Diameter: 10 5/8 inches.
2.7
A.
HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT
Lift to be operated by a submersible, elevator screw pump type power unit, consisting of an
integral 10 H.P. electric motor and hydraulic pump assembly, capable of 40 gallons per
minute,designed for total submersion in hydraulic fluid. Suspend pump and motor
assembly in a steel,oil reservoir with sufficient capacity to accommodate the total
displacement of the lift(s) and still remain submerged. The reservoir to have removable top
cover with rubber seal gasket. Pump must be capable of supplying 350 psi to the lift
furthest from the power unit. Isolate power unit from rigid piping by means of a flexible
hose. Electrical wiring harness provided to an external port for connection to power source.
(Electrical wiring, connections and hook up by electrical contractor).Tank to be installed
with external shut off/isolation valve. Power units with external motors and/or pumps are
not acceptable.
1.Lift and power unit shall include an initial fill of hydraulic fluid of one of the following:
• AW – 46 Standard petroleum based hydraulic oil
• EAL224H Bio degradable hoist oil
2. A combination magnetic motor starter and disconnect with push button “start/stop” and 115
volt control circuit shall be supplied for each power unit. Starter to have highly visible pilot light
to indicating “ON or RUN” mode. Surface mounted, NEMA 1, general purpose enclosure.
• Electrical requirements: 10 H.P. 115 volt, 60 cycle, 3 phase
• Electrical wiring and connections by electrical contractor
2.8 ADAPTER ADJUSTMENT
A. Both the front and rear jack assemblies shall be enclosed in an “ENVIROGUARD” coating
to protect the in ground metal components from electrolysis. This coating shall be factory
applied under proper quality control procedures and tested to assure conformance. Field
application of any electrolysis protective coating is not acceptable.
2.9 PLUMBING
A. All plumbing components shall be supplied by installing contractor and installed in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 5
B. The plumbing from the power unit to the hoist to be oil resistant, flexible hose with a
working pressure greater than 500 psi, run thru a PVC chase buried below the floor slab.
Rigid piping, direct buried, is not acceptable.
C. A test port to be installed between the power unit pressure regulator valve and the hoist
controls.
D. Air supply for the automatic lift locks shall be run thru chase and stubbed up at power unit
location with an inline filter/regulator, w/gauge, for connection by others.
2.10 HOIST PIT
A. The hoist shall be installed in a poured concrete pit/trench of sufficient size to accommodate
the full travel needed for minimum to maximum wheel base adjustments. Concrete strength of
minimum 3500 psi and reinforced per drawings. Floor of pit/trench to be sloped toward the front
to a floor sump. Pit construction shall conform to the dimensions required to provide the
performance needed to meet the manufacturers specifications and recommendations.
B. An air powered, diaphragm pump, ¾” input/output, with float actuated air valve and liquid
level control to be installed in the lift’s offset, suction to the pits sump and discharged to the
nearest floor trench drain. All piping to be non corrosive PVC. Air supply line run from nearest
compressed air source to pump with shut off at a convenient location above the floor.
2.11 WARRANTY
A.
Lifts shall be warranted to be manufactured from sound materials in a workmanship
like manner and guaranteed against failure due to defective materials and
workmanship for a period of one year. The jack components with “enviroguard”
applied shall be warranted against corrosion and electrolysis for a period of 10
years.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide a Reelcraft Model HSL56B or approved equal hose reel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until supporting structures have been properly prepared.
B.
If supporting structure preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
INSTALLATION
A.
2466 60
Install in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 6
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
Touch up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion
END OF SECTION 144550
2466 60
VEHICLE LIFT SYSTEM
145550 7
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single phase and polyphase, general purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
2466 60
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
220513 1
B.
2.3
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
E.
Rotor: Random wound, squirrel cage.
F.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H.
Insulation: Class F.
I.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
J.
2.4
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
SINGLE PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
Permanent split capacitor.
Electronically commutated.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque, permanent split capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
END OF SECTION 220513
2466 60
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
220513 2
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220517
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
Sleeves.
Sleeve seal systems.
Grout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Cast Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded
steel collar; zinc coated.
C.
Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeves:
coated, with plain ends.
2.2
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
SLEEVE SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
2466 60
Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 1
2.3
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post hardening and volume adjusting, dry,
hydraulic cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1 inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1.
C.
Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls
are constructed.
1.
2.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded PE or PP
sleeves.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
3.
D.
3.
2466 60
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve seal
system.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
2.
E.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 2
3.2
SLEEVE SEAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs on grade at service
piping entries into building.
B.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a
watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE SEAL FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve seal fittings.
3.4
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL SCHEDULE
A.
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast iron wall sleeves with sleeve seal system or
Galvanized steel wall sleeves with sleeve seal system.
1)
2.
Concrete Slabs on Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast iron wall sleeves with sleeve seal system or
Galvanized steel wall sleeves with sleeve seal system.
1)
3.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve seal system.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
2466 60
Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve seal system.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized steel pipe sleeves.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 3
4.
Interior Partitions:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized steel pipe sleeves.
END OF SECTION 220517
2466 60
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 4
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220518
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Escutcheons.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
One Piece, Cast Brass Type: With polished, chrome plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B.
One Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with chrome plated finish and
spring clip fasteners.
C.
Split Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome plated and rough brass finish and with
concealed hinge and setscrew.
2.2
FLOOR PLATES
A.
One Piece Floor Plates: Cast iron flange with holes for fasteners.
B.
Split Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
2466 60
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 1
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping
and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for New Piping:
a.
b.
2.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern type.
Chrome Plated Piping: One piece, cast brass type with polished, chrome plated
finish.
Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
a.
b.
c.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting brass
type with polished, chrome plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split casting brass type with rough
brass finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split casting brass type with rough brass
finish.
C.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment room floors.
D.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
1.
2.
New Piping: One piece, floor plate type.
Existing Piping: Split casting, floor plate type.
END OF SECTION 220518
2466 60
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 2
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220519
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Liquid in glass thermometers.
Thermowells.
Dial type pressure gages.
Gage attachments.
Test plugs.
Test plug kits.
Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and
combined domestic and fire protection water service meters outside the building.
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
2466 60
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For meters and gages to include in operation and
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
LIQUID IN GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Plastic Case, Industrial Style, Liquid in Glass Thermometers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Standard: ASME B40.200.
Case: Plastic; 9 inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Stem: Aluminum, brass, or stainless steel and of length to suit installation.
a.
9.
10.
2.2
Ernst Flow Industries.
Marsh Bellofram.
Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
Connector: 1 1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of
1.5 percent of scale range.
THERMOWELLS
A.
Thermowells:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
2466 60
Standard: ASME B40.200.
Description: Pressure tight, socket type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.
Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
Heat Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 2
2.3
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Direct Mounted, Plastic Case, Dial Type Pressure Gages:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.4
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
Ashcroft Inc.
Marsh Bellofram.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Standard: ASME B40.100.
Case: Sealed type; plastic; 4 1/2 inch nominal diameter.
Pressure Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom
outlet type unless back outlet type is indicated.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.
Pointer: Dark colored metal.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A.
Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston or
porous metal type surge dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B.
Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
2.5
TEST PLUGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Flow Design, Inc.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B.
Description: Test station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
C.
Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include
extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
D.
Thread Size: NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
E.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
2466 60
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 3
F.
2.6
Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self sealing rubber.
TEST PLUG KITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Flow Design, Inc.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B.
Furnish one test plug kit containing two thermometers, one pressure gage and adapter, and
carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
C.
Low Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1 to 2 inch diameter dial and
tapered end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.
D.
Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon tube insertion type with 2 to 3 inch diameter dial and probe.
Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.
E.
Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping
tees.
B.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if
required to match sizes.
C.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D.
Fill thermowells with heat transfer medium.
E.
Install direct mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
F.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
G.
Install test plugs in piping tees.
H.
Install thermometers in the following locations:
1.
2466 60
Inlet and outlet of each water heater.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 4
2.
3.
I.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot water storage tank.
At the end of each hot water run.
Building water service entrance into building.
Inlet and outlet of each pressure reducing valve.
Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance
of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
B.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot water storage tank shall be one of the
following:
1.
2.
C.
3.5
Industrial style, liquid in glass type.
Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self sealing rubber
inserts.
Industrial style, liquid in glass type.
Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self sealing rubber
inserts.
Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
THERMOMETER SCALE RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Domestic Cold Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F.
B.
Scale Range for Domestic Hot Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.
C.
Scale Range for Domestic Tempered Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.
2466 60
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 5
3.6
PRESSURE GAGE SCHEDULE
A.
Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
B.
Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure reducing valve shall be one of the
following:
1.
2.
C.
Sealed, direct mounted, plastic case.
Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self sealing rubber
inserts.
Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.7
Sealed, direct mounted, plastic case.
Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self sealing rubber
inserts.
Sealed, direct mounted, plastic case.
Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self sealing rubber
inserts.
PRESSURE GAGE SCALE RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.
B.
Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.
END OF SECTION 220519
2466 60
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 6
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220523
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Bronze ball valves.
Iron, single flange butterfly valves.
Iron, grooved end butterfly valves.
Bronze swing check valves.
Iron swing check valves.
Iron, grooved end swing check valves.
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping.
Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this
piping.
Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this
piping.
Section 334100 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping.
Section 334600 "Subdrainage" for valves applicable only to this piping.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
B.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C.
NBR: Acrylonitrile butadiene, Buna N, or nitrile rubber.
D.
NRS: Nonrising stem.
2466 60
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 1
E.
OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F.
RS: Rising stem.
G.
SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.6
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable water service.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
Block check valves in either closed or open position.
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A.
2466 60
Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 2
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
2.
E.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 inch stem extensions and the following features:
1.
2.
F.
2.2
Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non thermal conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
Valve End Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter turn types.
Handlever: For quarter turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP 45.
BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Two Piece, Full Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2466 60
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP 110.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Body Design: Two piece.
Body Material: Bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Bronze.
Ball: Chrome plated brass.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 3
j.
2.3
Port: Full.
IRON, SINGLE FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
200 CWP, Iron, Single Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.4
ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
DeZurik Water Controls.
Flo Fab Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Standard: MSS SP 67, Type I.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead end service at rated
pressure without use of downstream flange.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
Seat: EPDM.
Stem: One or two piece stainless steel.
Disc: Aluminum bronze.
IRON, GROOVED END BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
175 CWP, Iron, Grooved End Butterfly Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2466 60
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: MSS SP 67, Type I.
CWP Rating: 175 psig.
Body Material: Coated, ductile iron.
Stem: Two piece stainless steel.
Disc: Coated, ductile iron.
Seal: EPDM.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 4
2.5
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.6
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP 80, Type 3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Disc: Bronze.
IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2466 60
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP 71, Type I.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
Ends: Flanged.
Trim: Bronze.
Gasket: Asbestos free.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 5
2.7
IRON, GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
300 CWP, Iron, Grooved End Swing Check Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Anvil International, Inc.
Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products.
Victaulic Company.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
CWP Rating: 300 psig.
Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
Seal: EPDM.
Disc: Spring operated, ductile iron or stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
2466 60
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 6
E.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1.
3.3
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.
Butterfly Valve Dead End Service: Single flange (lug) type.
Throttling Service: Ball or butterfly valves.
Pump Discharge Check Valves:
a.
b.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.
NPS 2 1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever
and weight or with spring or iron, center guided, metal seat check valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.5
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder joint valve
end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
For Grooved End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.
DOMESTIC, HOT AND COLD WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
2.
3.
2466 60
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder joint ends instead of threaded ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 7
B.
Pipe NPS 2 1/2 and Larger:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Iron, Single Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM or NBR seat, aluminum bronze
disc.
Iron, Grooved End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP.
Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
Iron, Grooved End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
END OF SECTION 220523
2466 60
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 8
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Thermal hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design:
Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
2.
2466 60
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 1
3.
1.5
Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Carbon Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Description: MSS SP 58, Types 1 through 58, factory fabricated components.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless
steel.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.3
Description: MSS SP 69, Type 59, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made from
structural carbon steel shapes with MSS SP 58 carbon steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U
bolts.
THERMAL HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Insulation Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100 psig
or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125 psig minimum compressive
strength and vapor barrier.
B.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
C.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
D.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2466 60
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 2
2.4
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B.
Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert wedge type, zinc coated or stainless steel anchors, for
use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory mixed and packaged, dry, hydraulic cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000 psi , 28 day compressive strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP 69 and MSS SP 89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B.
Metal Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP 69 and MSS SP 89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Thermal Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
2466 60
Install powder actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
Install mechanical expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 3
E.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
F.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
G.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
H.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2 1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
I.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
K.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP 58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
2466 60
Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Install MSS SP 58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium silicate insulation inserts
of length at least as long as protective shield.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 4
6.
3.2
Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous thread hanger and support rods to 1 1/2 inches.
3.4
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP 69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use carbon steel pipe hangers and supports or metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for
general service applications.
F.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
G.
Use thermal hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
2466 60
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 5
H.
Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
2466 60
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Yoke Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes
NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
Carbon or Alloy Steel, Double Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable, Swivel Split or Solid Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Swivel Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
Extension Hinged or Two Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
U Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange or carbon steel plate.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange or carbon steel plate, and
with U bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion type support for pipes
NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast iron floor flange.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2 1/2 to
NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small
horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to
NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 6
I.
Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
2.
J.
Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
5.
K.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top Beam C Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
Side Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I beams.
Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I
beams for heavy loads.
Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
2466 60
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 7
L.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
M.
Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Restraint Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1 1/4 inches.
Spring Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with
springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
Variable Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
Variable Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
Variable Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a.
b.
c.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.
N.
Comply with MSS SP 69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
O.
Use powder actuated fasteners or mechanical expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 220529
2466 60
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 8
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Equipment labels.
Pipe labels.
Valve tags.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2466 60
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Letter Color: Black.
Background Color: White.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2 1/2 by 3/4 inch.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 1
6.
7.
8.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two thirds to three fourths the
size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8 1/2 by 11 inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2
PIPE LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
2.3
Flow Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1 1/2 inches.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2
inch numbers.
1.
2.
B.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8 1/2 by 11 inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1.
2.
2466 60
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
Fasteners: Brass wire link or beaded chain; or S hook.
Valve tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
Frame and hang a schedule in Mechanical Room 504.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
Domestic Water Piping:
a.
b.
2.
Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:
a.
b.
3.
Background Color: White.
Letter Color: Green.
Compressed Air Piping:
a.
b.
2466 60
Background Color: White.
Letter Color: Blue.
Background Color: White.
Letter Color: Black.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 3
3.4
VALVE TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn watering
hose connections; and similar roughing in connections of end use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1.
Valve Tag Size and Shape:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Valve Tag Color:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Cold Water: 1 1/2 inches, round.
Hot Water: 1 1/2 inches, round.
Hot Water Return: 1 1/2 inches, round.
Compressed Air: 1 1/2 inches, round.
Cold Water: Natural.
Hot Water: Natural.
Hot Water Return: Natural.
Compressed Air: Natural.
Letter Color:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Cold Water: Black.
Hot Water: Black.
Hot Water Return: Black.
Compressed Air: Black.
END OF SECTION 220553
2466 60
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 4
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 220719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Domestic cold water piping.
Domestic hot water piping.
Domestic recirculating hot water piping.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
2466 60
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed
index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame spread index of 75 or less, and smoke developed
index of 150 or less.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 1
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground
Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
2466 60
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
2.2
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000 Degree Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley K.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory applied ASJ or with factory
applied ASJ SSL. Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory Applied
Jackets" Article.
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
B.
Mineral Fiber, Hydraulic Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
2.3
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super Stik.
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik Cote.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL A 3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL A 3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2466 60
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP 127.
Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85 60/85 70.
Mon Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 25.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP 82.
Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries; 225.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 3
c.
d.
D.
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85 20.
Mon Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 25.
Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.
Johns Manville; Zeston Perma Weld, CEEL TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL PRF 19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Vapor Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2466 60
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30 80/30 90.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP 30.
Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries; 501.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30 35.
Mon Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 10.
Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35 mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
Color: White.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 4
D.
Vapor Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30 mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; Encacel.
Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries; 570.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 60 95/60 96.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP 10.
Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries; 550.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 46 50.
Mon Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 50.
Vimasco Corporation; WC 1/WC 5.
Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625 inch dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F .
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A.
Description: Comply with MIL A 3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
2.
For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
2466 60
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP 50 AHV2.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30 36.
Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.
Fire resistant, water based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire
resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 5
5.
2.6
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
Color: White or gray.
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP 76.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire and water resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
FACTORY APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory applied jackets on various applications. When
factory applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
2.8
ASJ: White, kraft paper, fiberglass reinforced scrim with aluminum foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ SSL: ASJ with self sealing, pressure sensitive, acrylic based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
PVC Jacket: High impact resistant, UV resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354 C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field applied jacket schedules.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2466 60
Johns Manville; Zeston.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.
Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 6
3.
Factory fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a.
2.9
Shapes: 45 and 90 degree, short and long radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor retarder tape matching factory applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor retarder tape matching field applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.10
A.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.
Compac Corporation; 130.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 6 mils.
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 500 percent.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
Bands:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2466 60
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul Mate Strapping and Seals.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 7
2.
3.
B.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H 14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
Wire: 0.080 inch nickel copper alloy.
1.
Manufacturers:
following:
a.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
C & F Wire.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
Comply with
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
2466 60
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 8
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3 inch wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
2466 60
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 9
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Vibration control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
B.
Insulation Installation at Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations:
continuously through penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions.
1.
C.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire resistive joint sealers.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.5
Install insulation
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2466 60
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 10
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2466 60
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 11
3.6
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL FIBER INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral fiber blanket insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
D.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FIELD APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1 inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
2466 60
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 12
3.8
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Underground piping.
Stainless steel or chrome plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel
injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Domestic Cold Water:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
2.
NPS 1 1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
B.
Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
2.
Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
NPS 1 1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
3.10
Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
INDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory applied jacket, install the
field applied jacket over the factory applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Piping, Concealed:
1.
2466 60
None.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 13
D.
Piping, Exposed in finished spaces:
1.
PVC: 30 mils thick.
END OF SECTION 220719
2466 60
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220719 14
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.
Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water service piping and water
meters outside the building from source to the point where water service piping enters the
building.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B.
Field quality control reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B.
Potable water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping
components shall be marked with "NSF pw."
2466 60
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 1
2.2
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B.
Cast Copper, Solder Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
C.
Wrought Copper, Solder Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper pressure fittings.
D.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends.
E.
Copper Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
MSS SP 123.
Cast copper alloy, hexagonal stock body.
Ball and socket, metal to metal seating surfaces.
Solder joint or threaded ends.
Appurtenances for Grooved End Copper Tubing:
1.
Manufacturers:
following:
a.
2.
3.
Victaulic Company.
Bronze Fittings for Grooved End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 copper tube or
ASTM B 584 bronze castings.
Mechanical Couplings for Grooved End Copper Tubing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.3
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
Copper tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606.
Ferrous housing sections.
EPDM rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water.
Bolts and nuts.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe Flange Gasket Materials:
1.
2.
AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic
and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
Full face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal, Pipe Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead free alloys.
D.
Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
2466 60
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 2
2.4
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Factory fabricated, bolted, companion flange assembly.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Central Plastics Company.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
Dielectric Nipples:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
2466 60
Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.
Central Plastics Company.
Matco Norca.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
Elster Perfection Corporation.
Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.
Matco Norca.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 3
4.
5.
6.
Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic
water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C.
Install shutoff valve, hose end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside
the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure
gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for
drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
D.
Install water pressure reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements for pressure reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
E.
Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
F.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
G.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
H.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
I.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
J.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
L.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
M.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
2466 60
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 4
N.
Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged
booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and
Gages for Plumbing Piping."
O.
Install thermostats in hot water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in
Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."
P.
Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with
requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
Q.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
R.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
S.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.2
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D.
Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water flushable flux to end of tube.
Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
E.
Joint Construction for Grooved End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606.
Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting.
Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and
tighten housing bolts.
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
3.3
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
2466 60
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 5
B.
Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1.
2.
C.
3.4
Fittings for NPS 1 1/2 and Smaller: Fitting type coupling.
Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve type coupling.
Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic to
metal transition fittings or unions.
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges, flange kits, or nipples.
D.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.5
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
D.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
2466 60
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 1 and NPS 1 1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 1 1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 2 1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8 inch rod.
NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4 inch rod.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 6
F.
Install hangers for stainless steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
NPS 1 1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 1 1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 2 1/2: 11 feet with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 3 and NPS 3 1/2: 12 feet with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8 inch rod.
NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4 inch rod.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8 inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical stainless steel piping every 15 feet.
H.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP 69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to water service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold water suction and discharge piping.
Water Heaters: Cold water inlet and hot water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold and hot water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than that required by plumbing code.
Equipment: Cold and hot water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2 1/2 and larger.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
2466 60
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 7
3.8
ADJUSTING
A.
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
Adjust balancing valves in hot water circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.9
Manually adjust ball type balancing valves in hot water circulation return piping
to provide hot water flow in each branch.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
2)
c.
d.
e.
B.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Clean non potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
2466 60
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are
not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 8
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water
sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.10
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
D.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.11
A.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast or wrought copper, solder joint fittings;
and soldered joints.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; grooved joint, copper tube appurtenances; and
grooved joints.
VALVE SCHEDULE
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast or wrought copper, solder joint fittings;
and soldered joints.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves
with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 1/2 and larger.
Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or
ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 1/2 and larger.
Hot Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory stop balancing valves.
Drain Duty: Hose end drain valves.
Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
END OF SECTION 221116
2466 60
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 9
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Backflow preventers.
Water pressure reducing valves.
Balancing valves.
Water hammer arresters.
Drain valves.
Trap seal primer devices.
Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure
gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Field quality control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
2466 60
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
2.2
Potable water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise
indicated.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Double Check, Backflow Prevention Assemblies:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Standard: ASSE 1015.
Operation: Continuous pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.
Size: 6 NPS.
Design Flow Rate: 300 gpm.
Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: 5 psig for sizes NPS 2 and smaller; 5 psig for
NPS 2 1/2 and larger.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2 1/2 and larger.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 1/2 and larger.
Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
Accessories:
a.
b.
B.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.
Valves NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: Outside screw and yoke gate type with flanged
ends on inlet and outlet.
Dual Check Valve Backflow Preventers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2466 60
Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 2
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Standard: ASSE 1024.
Operation: Continuous pressure applications.
Size: NPS 3/4 NPS 1.
Body: Bronze with union inlet.
Backflow Preventer Test Kits:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.4
Honeywell International Inc.
Legend Valve.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test
procedure instructions.
WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A.
Water Regulators:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Standard: ASSE 1003.
Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
Size: ¾” or 1”
Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 14 psig.
Body: Bronze with chrome plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller.
BALANCING VALVES
A.
2466 60
Cast Iron Calibrated Balancing Valves:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 3
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
Armstrong International, Inc.
Flo Fab Inc.
ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett Div.
NIBCO Inc.
TAC.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Type: Adjustable with Y pattern globe valve, two readout ports, and memory setting
indicator.
Size: Same as connected piping, but not smaller than NPS 2 1/2.
B.
Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
C.
Memory Stop Balancing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.6
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO Inc.
Standard: MSS SP 110 for two piece, copper alloy ball valves.
Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP.
Size: NPS 2 or smaller.
Body: Copper alloy.
Port: Standard or full port.
Ball: Chrome plated brass.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
Handle: Vinyl covered steel with memory setting device.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A.
Water Hammer Arresters:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2466 60
AMTROL, Inc.
Josam Company.
MIFAB, Inc.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 4
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201.
Type: Metal bellows.
Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI WH 201, Sizes A through F.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Ball Valve Type, Hose End Drain Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.8
Standard: MSS SP 110 for standard port, two piece ball valves.
Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP.
Size: NPS 3/4.
Body: Copper alloy.
Ball: Chrome plated brass.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
Handle: Vinyl covered steel.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
TRAP SEAL PRIMER DEVICES
A.
Barrier Type Trap Seal Protection Devices (TP 1):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SureSeal
Manufacturing; Inline Floor Drain Trap Sealer:
Standard: ASSE 1072 2007.
Body: ASB Plastic
Diaphragm & Sealing Gasket: Neoprene Rubber
Size: 2 inch, 3 inch or 4 inch.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: Compression fit sealing gasket 80 durometer.
End Connections NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2466 60
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 5
2.
3.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric vent drain connection with air gap
fitting, fixed air gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
B.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory stop
balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
C.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
D.
Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI WH 201.
E.
Install trap seal protection devices during trim out stage of project.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Test each double check, backflow prevention assembly according to authorities having
jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B.
Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field adjustable pressure set points of water pressure reducing valves.
B.
Set field adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
2466 60
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 6
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 221223
FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Steel, precharged, potable water storage tanks.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
2.
1.4
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for water storage tanks.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components
water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.
Health Effects," for potable
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL, PRECHARGED, POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
A.
2466 60
Steel, Precharged, Bladder, Water Storage Tanks:
FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
221223 1
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Wessels Company.
Wood, John Co.
Description: Steel, vertical, pressured rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls and with air
charging valve and air precharge.
Operation: Factory installed, butyl rubber bladder.
B.
Construction: Steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 125 psig working pressure.
C.
Tappings: Factory fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
1.
2.
D.
NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread.
NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.
Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:
1.
Pressure gage.
E.
Vertical Tank Supports: Factory fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
testing and labeling.
F.
Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for
potable water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
G.
Exterior Coating: Manufacturer's standard enamel paint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so
devices needing servicing are accessible.
B.
Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.
C.
Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping if indicated.
Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping."
D.
Install the following devices on tanks where indicated:
1.
2.
E.
2466 60
Temperature and pressure relief valves.
Connections to accessories.
After installing tanks with factory finish, inspect finishes and repair damages to finishes.
FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
221223 2
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to potable water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves.
Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.
1.
General duty valves are specified in Section 220523 "General Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
3.3
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball.
Valves NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: Butterfly.
Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple in outlet with,
ASME B1.20.7, 3/4 11.5NH thread for garden hose service, threaded cap, and
chain.
Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric
fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
Connect air piping to hydropneumatic tanks with unions or flanges and gate or ball
valves. Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings, which are
specified in Section 221513 "General Service Compressed Air Piping."
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.4
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following final checks before filling:
1.
2.
3.
Verify that air precharge in precharged tanks is correct.
Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.
a.
b.
4.
Verify that vacuum relief valves are correct size.
a.
b.
B.
Manually operate pressure relief valves.
Adjust pressure settings.
Manually operate vacuum relief valves.
Adjust vacuum settings.
Filling Procedures:
operating level.
Follow manufacturer's written procedures.
Fill tanks with water to
END OF SECTION 221223
2466 60
FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
221223 3
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 221313
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes gravity flow, non pressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with
the following components:
1.
2.
1.3
Cleanouts.
Precast concrete & Fiberglass manholes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene plastic.
B.
FRP: Fiberglass reinforced plastic.
C.
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
D.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E.
TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Gravity Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage Piping Pressure Rating: 10 foot head of water.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For the following:
1.
2466 60
Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 1
B.
Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same
trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship
between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.
C.
Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not
less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate
manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing
system piping.
D.
Field quality control test reports.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B.
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C.
Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption
of service.
Do not proceed with interruption of service without Construction Manager's written
permission.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining
materials.
DUCTILE IRON, GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe: ASTM A 746, for push on joints.
B.
Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push on joints.
C.
Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push on joints.
D.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
2466 60
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 2
2.3
ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751, with bell and spigot ends for gasketed joints.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
NPS 3 to NPS 6: SDR 35.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: SDR 42.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell and
spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
B.
PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, with bell and spigot ends;
ASTM D 3034 fittings, with bell ends; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
2.5
CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
2.6
Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14, Class 1, with bell and spigot
ends for gasketed joints with ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets.
NONPRESSURE TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve type, reducing or transition coupling, for
joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and
corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B.
Sleeve Materials:
1.
2.
3.
For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber.
For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C.
Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion resistant metal tension band
and tightening mechanism on each end.
D.
Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full length,
corrosion resistant outer shield and corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening
mechanism on each end.
E.
Ring Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell
of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
F.
Nonpressure Type, Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve type reducing or transition type
mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion resistant metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
2466 60
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 3
2.7
CLEANOUTS
A.
2.8
PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser
to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.
MANHOLES
A.
Designed Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for
A 16 (ASSHTO HS20 44), heavy traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to
manhole as required to prevent flotation.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe
connection.
Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both
feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps
into sidewalls at 12 to 16 inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole
to finished grade is less than 36 inches.
Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter
matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
Grade Rings: Reinforced concrete rings, 6 to 9 inch total thickness, to match diameter
of manhole frame and cover.
Protective Coating: Plant applied, SSPC Paint 16, coal tar, epoxy polyamide paint; 10
mil minimum thickness applied to exterior surfaces.
Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 inch ID by 7 to 9 inch riser with 4 inch
minimum width flange and 26 inch diameter cover. Include indented top design with
lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."
a.
b.
B.
Fiberglass Manholes: ASTM D 3753, fabricated, FRP.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2466 60
Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 40 18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating: Foundry applied, SSPC Paint 16, coal tar, epoxy polyamide
paint; 10 mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete base as required to prevent flotation.
Base Section: Concrete, 6 inch minimum thickness.
Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe
connection.
Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both
feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps
into sidewalls at 12 to 16 inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole
to finished grade is less than 36 inches.
Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter
matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
Grade Rings: Reinforced concrete rings, 6 to 9 inch total thickness, to match diameter
of manhole frame and cover.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 4
8.
Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 inch ID by 7 to 9 inch riser with 4 inch
minimum width flange and 26 inch diameter cover. Include indented top design with
lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."
a.
b.
2.9
Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 40 18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating: Foundry applied, SSPC Paint 16, coal tar, epoxy polyamide
paint; 10 mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
CONCRETE
A.
General: Cast in place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious
materials ratio.
1.
2.
C.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
Water: Potable.
Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement
design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
Include channels and benches in manholes.
1.
Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
a.
2.
Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a.
D.
A.
2466 60
Slope: 4 percent.
Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58
maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
1.
2.
2.10
Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.
Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Paint: SSPC Paint 16.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may
be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Use nonpressure type flexible couplings where required to join gravity flow, nonpressure
sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
b.
c.
B.
3.3
Unshielded flexiblecouplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.
Unshielded, increaser/reducer pattern, flexiblecouplings for pipes with different
OD.
Ring type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space
between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
Gravity Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size
range:
1.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 ductile iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile iron standard or
compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed
joints.
3.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
4.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 Class 1, nonreinforced concrete sewer pipe and fittings,
gaskets, and gasketed joints.
5.
NPS 8 and NPS 10: ABS, SDR 42, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
6.
NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
7.
NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed
joints.
8.
NPS 8 and NPS 10: Nonreinforced concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and
gasketed joints.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping
layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
2466 60
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 6
C.
Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D.
Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E.
Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling,
jacking, or combination of both.
F.
Install gravity flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
G.
3.4
Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope as shown on plans.
Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in
direction. Use corrosion resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint
system, or cast in place concrete supports or anchors.
Install piping with 60 inch minimum cover.
Install piping below frost line.
Install ductile iron, gravity sewer piping according to ASTM A 746.
Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
Install nonreinforced concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's
"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of
incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for
Plumbing" Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Join gravity flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1.
Join ductile iron, gravity sewer piping according to AWWA C600 for push on joints.
2.
Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for elastomeric
seal joints.
3.
Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric
seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric gasket joints.
4.
Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric seal
joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.
5.
Join nonreinforced concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 and ACPA's
"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber gasket joints.
6.
Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure type, flexible couplings.
3.5
MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
2466 60
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 7
B.
Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C.
Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
E.
Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
3.7
Place cast in place concrete according to ACI 318/318R.
CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast iron soil
pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast iron soil pipe for riser extensions
to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B.
Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast in place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches
deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.
C.
Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.8
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect nonpressure, gravity flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains
specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
B.
Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.
1.
2.
3.
Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye
fitting, plus 6 inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 day
compressive strength of 3000 psi.
Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye
with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to
underground manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3
inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe
passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside
wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole wall, encase entering
connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional
support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.
a.
2466 60
Use concrete that will attain minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi,
unless otherwise indicated.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 8
b.
4.
C.
3.9
Use epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and
piping materials.
Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while
making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may
accumulate.
Connect to oil sediment interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste
Interceptors."
CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS
A.
Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in
place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may
result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1.
2.
B.
Abandoned Manholes: Excavate around manhole as required and use either procedure below:
1.
2.
C.
3.10
Close open ends of piping with at least 8 inch thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable
methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
Remove manhole and close open ends of remaining piping.
Remove top of manhole down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12
inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.
Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
PAINTING
A.
Clean and prepare concrete manhole surfaces for field painting. Remove loose efflorescence,
chalk, dust, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to remove glaze.
Paint the following concrete surfaces as recommended by paint manufacturer:
1.
Precast Concrete Manholes: All exterior.
B.
Prepare ferrous frame and cover surfaces according to SSPC PA 1 and paint according to
SSPC PA 1 and SSPC Paint 16. Do not paint surfaces with foundry applied corrosion resistant
coating.
3.11
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange
for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground
manholes.
1.
2.
2466 60
Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground
manholes.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 9
3.12
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1.
2.
Submit separate report for each system inspection.
Defects requiring correction include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
B.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
Submit separate report for each test.
Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
7.
2466 60
Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of
pipe, during 24 hour period.
Close openings in system and fill with water.
Purge air and refill with water.
Disconnect water supply.
Test and inspect joints for leaks.
Option: Test ductile iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic
Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.
Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, UNI B 6, and the following:
a.
b.
C.
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.
Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924.
Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 10
D.
3.13
A.
Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
CLEANING
Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous material.
END OF SECTION 221313
2466 60
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221313 11
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
Specialty pipe fittings.
Section 221313 "Facility Sanitary Sewers" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures
outside the building.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1.
1.4
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 foot head of water.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Field quality control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for
plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent
piping and "NSF sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
2466 60
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
HUBLESS, CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B.
CISPI, Hubless Piping Couplings:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
C.
Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
Description: Stainless steel corrugated shield with stainless steel bands and tightening
devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
Heavy Duty, Hubless Piping Couplings:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
2.3
ANACO Husky.
Clamp All Corp.
Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
MIFAB, Inc.
Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
Stant.
Tyler Pipe.
ANACO Husky.
Clamp All Corp.
Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
MIFAB, Inc.
Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
Stant.
Tyler Pipe.
Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.
Description: Stainless steel shield with stainless steel bands and tightening devices; and
ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
2466 60
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 2
B.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder joint fittings.
C.
Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder joint end.
1.
2.
D.
2.4
Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos free, 1/8
inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water flushable flux.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Solid Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns
and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C.
Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1.
2.
D.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1.
2.
2.5
Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers."
PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers."
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Transition Couplings:
1.
2.
3.
General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in
OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with
pipes to be joined.
Fitting Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping
system fitting.
Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a.
b.
2466 60
Standard: ASTM C 1173.
Description: Elastomeric, sleeve type, reducing or transition pattern. Include
shear ring and corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on
each end.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 3
c.
Sleeve Materials:
1)
2)
3)
4.
Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a.
b.
5.
Standard: ASTM C 1460.
Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full length, corrosion resistant
outer shield and corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism
on each end.
Pressure Transition Couplings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Standard: AWWA C219.
Description: Metal, sleeve type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to,
and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
Center Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.
Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
Metal Component Finish: Corrosion resistant coating or material.
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.
2.
Dielectric Flanges:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
Central Plastics Company.
Matco Norca, Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2466 60
For Cast Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible
with pipe materials being joined.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Factory fabricated, bolted, companion flange assembly.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 4
3.
Dielectric Flange Insulating Kits:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Central Plastics Company.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
4.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
Dielectric Nipples:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
Elster Perfection.
Grinnell Mechanical Products.
Matco Norca, Inc.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Standard: IAPMO PS 66
Electroplated steel nipple.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EARTH MOVING
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
2466 60
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 5
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long turn,
double Y branch and 1/8 bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
K.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
L.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
M.
Install cast iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
N.
Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
O.
Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
2466 60
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 6
P.
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
2.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with
closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force main piping. Comply with
requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping
Specialties."
Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity flow piping. Comply with requirements for
drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
Q.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
R.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
S.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
T.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join hubless, cast iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless piping coupling joints.
B.
Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828.
ASTM B 813, water flushable, lead free flux and ASTM B 32, lead free alloy solder.
C.
Plastic, Nonpressure Piping, Solvent Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1.
2.
3.4
Use
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Transition Couplings:
1.
2.
B.
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
2466 60
Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.
In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges, flange kits, or nipples.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 7
4.
3.5
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install carbon steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.
Install stainless steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.
Install carbon steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.
Install stainless steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a.
b.
c.
7.
8.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double rod hangers, with 3/8 inch minimum rods.
E.
Install hangers for cast iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 1 1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 inch rod.
Spacing for 10 foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to
60 inches.
F.
Install supports for vertical cast iron soil piping every 15 feet .
G.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2466 60
NPS 1 1/4: 84 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 1 1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 2 1/2: 11 feet with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8 inch rod.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 8
H.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 1 1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 1 1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
NPS 2 1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 inch rod.
NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 inch rod.
I.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
J.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP 69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
3.7
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover
flush with floor.
Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary
Waste Piping Specialties."
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2 1/2 and
larger.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
2466 60
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 9
1.
2.
Roughing in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in
after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.9
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
Roughing in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside
leaders on completion of roughing in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1 inch wg. Use U tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D.
Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water
based latex paint.
2466 60
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 10
3.10
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Hubless, cast iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy duty hubless piping couplings; and
coupled joints.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
2.
E.
Hubless, cast iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless piping couplings; and coupled
joints.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.
Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:
1.
2.
Solid wall PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent cemented joints.
Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Unshieldeded, nonpressure transition couplings.
END OF SECTION 221316
2466 60
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 11
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Cleanouts.
Floor drains.
Trench drains.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for storm drainage piping inside the
building, drainage piping specialties, and drains.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
2466 60
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 1
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast in Place
Concrete."
B.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts (CO):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
Body Material: Hubless, cast iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
Closure: Countersunk or raised head, brass or cast iron plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Closure: Stainless steel plug with seal.
Metal Floor Cleanouts (CO):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
2466 60
Josam Company; Josam Div.
MIFAB, Inc.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
Oatey.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.
Size: Same as connected branch.
Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 2
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
Clamping Device: Not required.
Outlet Connection: Spigot.
Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set screws or other device.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel bronze, copper alloy.
Frame and Cover Shape: Square.
Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
Cast Iron Wall Cleanouts (WCO):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Josam Company; Josam Div.
MIFAB, Inc.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; d of Smith Industries, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
Body: Hubless, cast iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
Closure: Countersunk or raised head, drilled and threaded, brass plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome plated brass or stainless steel cover plate with screw.
Wall Access: Round, nickel bronze, copper alloy, or stainless steel wall installation
frame and cover.
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Cast Iron Floor Drains (FD 1):
1.
Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Watts
Model FD 100 M or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
2466 60
Josam Company; Josam Div.
MIFAB, Inc.
Prier Products, Inc.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
Pattern: Floor drain.
Body Material: Gray iron.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 3
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Seepage Flange: Required.
Anchor Flange: Required.
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
Top Shape: Square.
Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 6” x 6”
Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
Trap Protection: TP 1.
Cast Iron Floor Drains (FD 2):
1.
Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Watts
Model FD 100 M or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.3
Josam Company; Josam Div.
MIFAB, Inc.
Prier Products, Inc.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
Pattern: Floor drain.
Body Material: Gray iron.
Seepage Flange: Required.
Anchor Flange: Required.
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
Top Shape: Round.
Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 6”
Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
Trap Protection: TP 1.
TRENCH DRAINS
A.
Trench Drains (TD 1):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2466 60
Josam Company; Josam Div 76010 Series.
MIFAB, Inc T1350 FL Series.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc 9828 Series.
Watts Drainage Products Inc. DX Series.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 4
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation Z800 Series.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.
Grate Material: Stainless Steel, Ductile or gray iron.
Dimensions of Frame and Grate: 12” x 48’ 0”
Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty (School bus loading).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
B.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
C.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
D.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4 inch
total depression.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1
inch total depression.
Install floor drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
Install wood blocking reinforcement for wall mounting type specialties.
F.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
2466 60
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 5
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping
installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
2466 60
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 6
Kingscott Associates, Inc.
Architects/Engineers
Kalamazoo, Michigan
Dexter Community Schools
Dexter Transportation Bus Wash
Dexter, Michigan
SECTION 221513
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes piping and related specialties for general service compressed air systems
operating at 200 psig or less.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Low Pressure Compressed Air Piping: System of compressed air piping and specialties
operating at pressures of 150 psig or less.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
Flexible pipe connectors.
Safety valves.
Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics.
Automatic drain valves.
Lubricators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics.
Quick couplings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
2466 60
Operation and Maintenance Data: For general service compressed air piping specialties to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
221513 1
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or to AWS B2.2, "Standard for
Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low pressure compressed air
piping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
Schedule 40, Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, black or hot dip zinc
coated with ends threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Steel Nipples:
ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, galvanized seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.
Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 or 300, threaded.
Malleable Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, threaded.
Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, carbon steel, threaded.
Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, carbon steel.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed air piping system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
2.3
Full Face Type: For flat face, Class 125, cast iron and cast bronze flanges.
Narrow Face Type: For raised face, Class 250, cast iron and steel flanges.
VALVES
A.
2.4
Metal Ball, Butterfly, Check, Gate, and Globe Valves: Comply with requirements in Division
22 Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
2466 60
Flex Hose Co., Inc.
Flexicraft Industries.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
221513 2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Bronze Hose Flexible Pipe Connectors:
covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Corrugated bronze tubing with bronze wire braid
Working Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.
End Connections, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain end copper tube.
End Connections, NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
Stainless Steel Hose Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated stainless steel tubing with stainless
steel wire braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Mercer Rubber Co.
Metraflex, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Unaflex, Inc.
Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Company
Working Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.
End Connections, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel pipe nipple.
End Connections, NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
SPECIALTIES
A.
Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"
construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of bronze body
with poppet type safety valve for compressed air service.
1.
B.
Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver
pressure rating.
Air Main Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct acting, spring loaded manual pressure
setting adjustment, and rated for 250 psig inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Type: Pilot operated.
C.
Automatic Drain Valves: Stainless steel body and internal parts, rated for 200 psig minimum
working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate. Include mounting
bracket if wall mounting is indicated.
D.
Air Line Lubricators: With drip chamber and sight dome for observing oil drop entering air
stream; with oil feed adjustment screw and quick release collar for easy bowl removal. Include
mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated.
1.
2.6
Provide with automatic feed device for supplying oil to lubricator.
QUICK COUPLINGS
A.
2466 60
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
221513 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Aeroquip Corporation; Eaton Corp.
Bowes Manufacturing Inc.
Foster Manufacturing, Inc.
Milton Industries, Inc.
Parker Hannifin Corp.; Fluid Connectors Group; Quick Coupling Div.
Rectus Corp.
Schrader Bridgeport; Amflo Div.
Schrader Bridgeport/Standard Thomson.
Snap Tite, Inc.; Quick Disconnect & Valve Division.
TOMCO Products Inc.
Tuthill Corporation; Hansen Coupling Div.
B.
General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking mechanism feature for
quick connection and disconnection of compressed air hose.
C.
Automatic Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight through brass body with O ring or gasket seal
and stainless steel or nickel plated steel operating parts.
1.
2.
D.
Socket End: With one way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded
hose fitting.
Plug End: Straight through type with barbed outlet for attaching hose.
Valveless Quick Couplings: Straight through brass body with stainless steel or nickel plated
steel operating parts.
1.
2.
Socket End: With O ring or gasket seal, without valve, and with barbed inlet for
attaching hose.
Plug End: With barbed outlet for attaching hose.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Low Pressure Compressed Air Distribution Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
size range:
1.
3.2
NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40, black steel pipe; threaded, malleable iron fittings; and
threaded joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
General Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping" for metal general duty valves. Use metal valves, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2466 60
Metal General Duty Valves: Use valve types specified in "Valve Applications" Article in
Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" according to the
following:
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
221513 4
a.
b.
3.3
Low Pressure Compressed Air:
Valve types specified for low pressure
compressed air.
Equipment Isolation NPS 2 and Smaller: Safety exhaust, copper alloy ball valve
with exhaust vent and pressure rating at least as great as piping system operating
pressure.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
compressed air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, air compressor sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants,
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
to coordinate with other services occupying that space.
E.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
F.
Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
G.
Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same as or higher than system pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Equipment and Specialty Flanged Connections:
1.
Use steel companion flange with gasket for connection to steel pipe.
I.
Install eccentric reducers where compressed air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with
bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J.
Install branch connections to compressed air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and
drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
L.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
M.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
N.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
O.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
2466 60
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
221513 5
P.
3.4
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
3.5
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves
for Plumbing
B.
Install shutoff valve at inlet to each automatic drain valve, filter, lubricator, and pressure
regulator.
C.
Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed air flow to and from
compressed air piping specialties and equipment.
3.6
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A.
Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping of each air compressor.
B.
Install bronze hose flexible pipe connectors in copper compressed air tubing.
C.
Install stainless steel hose flexible pipe connectors in steel compressed air piping.
3.7
SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A.
Install safety valves on receivers in quantity and size to relieve at least the capacity of connected
air compressors.
B.
Install air main pressure regulators in compressed air piping at or near air compressors.
C.
Install air line pressure regulators in branch piping to equipment and tools.
2466 60
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
221513 6